Home

Lucent Technologies Window SLV 9124 User's Manual

1. 0055 3 11 Automatically Removing a Circuit 0 00 ccc eee ee eee 3 13 Setting Up Management sisicdcdsrsaccs gues tandadetde dansae onie endi 3 14 Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site 3 14 Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP 3 15 Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity at the Central Site 3 15 Setting Up Back to Back Operation 00 cece eee eee 3 16 Changing Operating Mode 060c cece ence eee eee 3 16 Conmiguraton Option Tables siccjsositaceiiarediawedesdosdadraduaced 3 17 Configuring the Overall System 20 00 cece eee eee eee 3 17 Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System 3 18 Configuring Service Level Verification Options 3 20 Configuring General System Options 000020 eee 3 22 Configuring the Physical Interfaces 00 ccc eee ee eens 3 24 Configuring the Network Interface 000ee eee eee 3 24 Configuring the User Data Port 0 c cee eee eee 3 28 Configuring the DSX 1 Interface 2c cece eee 3 30 Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections 00 cece eee 3 32 Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface 3 32 Assigning DSX 1 Time Slots to the Network Interface 3 34 Glearing ASSIGNIMCMS c2ccidevdiatoiuddadnateiGarrduaroadugand 3 39 Configuring Frame Relay for an Interfa
2. Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command to the MIB objects This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP Get and Set commands to the MIB objects However access for all read only objects is specified as read only 3 58 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out 9124 A2 LB20 00 Select SNMP Traps from the Management and Communication menu to configure SNMP traps and dial out when a trap is generated see Table 3 16 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps See Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults for trap format standards and special trap features including RMON specific traps and the default settings that will generate RMON specific SNMP traps Table 3 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 1 of 4 SNMP Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit sends trap messages to the currently configured SNMP trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages Disable Does not send trap messages Number of Trap Managers Possible Settings 1 6 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that will receive SNMP trap messages from the FrameSaver unit An NMS IP Address must be configured in the
3. 3 56 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Table 3 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options 3 of 3 Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Sets the amount of keyboard inactive time allowed before a user session is disconnected Display Conditions This option does not appear when Inactivity Timeout is disabled 1 60 Up to an hour can be set FTP Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the system responds as a server when an FTP file transfer protocol client on an interconnected IP network requests an FTP session This option must be enabled when downloading files Enable Allows an FTP session between the system and an FTP client Disable Does not allow FTP sessions FTP Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a login ID and password are required for an FTP session If required the login used is the same login used for a menu driven user interface session This option does not affect the TS Management Link Enable User is prompted for a login ID and password Disable No login is required for an FTP session FTP Max Receive Rate kbps Possible Settings 1 1536 Default Setting 1536 Sets the maximum receive rate of file transfer to the system This option allows new software an
4. devLastTrapString to threshold of 1 devHealthAndStatus mib March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults RMON Alarm and Event Defaults The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event information Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor When the threshold set for the monitored variable is exceeded an SNMP trap or a log event is sent Event Defaults Since all events sent are under the control of the FrameSaver unit there is no need to define multiple events for each alarm type so only the following two events need to be generated eventIndex eventDescription eventType eventCommunity 1 Default SLV Rising Event log and trap 4 0 2 Default SLV Falling Event log and trap 4 0 The alarm default tables starting on the next page show how each RMON default alarm is set by the FrameSaver unit shows the alarm and event types the interval used when generating alarms and thresholds Physical Interface Alarm Defaults m Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults DLC Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area DLC Alarm Defaults NetScout Area See Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps for information about how traps work and Traps RMON Specific for traps specific to remote monitoring Rising Event Operation If a rising threshold is crossed during the interval shown in a table e g frames dropped by the network the event is armed and an
5. Data Channel Loopbacks on a Frame Relay Link Send Remote Line Loopback Send and Monitor Pattern Tests P Ping Test Lamp Test Problem Indicators 6 2 The unit provides a number of indicators to alert you to possible problems Indicators See LEDs Viewing LEDs and Control Leads and LED Descriptions in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance as well as the user interface screen Main Menu gt Status gt Display LEDs and Control LEDs Health and Status Health and Status Messages in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance Main Menu gt Status System and Test Status Messages also appear at the bottom of any menu driven user interface screen Performance statistics Performance Statistics in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance to help you determine how long a problem has existed Alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP trap Alarms on page 6 7 SNMP traps Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps supported include warm start authentication failure enterprise specific those specific to the unit link up and link down March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Troubleshooting Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication You can reset the unit in one of four ways Reset it from the Control menu Cycle the power Reset the configuration options for the COM port or reload the factory default settings Set th
6. Main Menu gt Test gt Data Port PVC Tests PVC Loopback Port PVC Loopback Network 98 16187 This test sends packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device To send a pattern test on a link Main Menu gt Test gt Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests gt Send Pattern If the selected And the default DLCI is configured as Then Rate kbps setting is Standard Disruptive appears 100 of CIR after Test Multiplexed Non Disruptive 10 of CIR appears after Test If the CIR is zero the pattern will be sent at a rate of 1000 bps March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Monitor Pattern Connectivity 9124 A2 LB20 00 Troubleshooting This test monitors packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device To monitor a pattern test on a link Main Menu gt Test gt Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests gt Monitor Pattern The current number of sequence and data errors are shown under the Result column when the FrameSaver unit is in sync An Out of Syne message appears when 5 frames out of 25 are missing or out of sequence These error counts are updated every second If the maximum count is reached 99999 appears in these fields Connectivity is a proprietary method that
7. 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 39 1 D Network Frames Offered MIB pdn_FrExt mib E nein Tag devFrExtDiciRmtOffFrinCir 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask B 24 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 History OID Cross Reference 3 of 4 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 41 1 D Network Frames Dropped In CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciDropOffFrinCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 43 1 D Network Frames Offered Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRmtOffFrOutCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 45 1 D Network Frames Lost Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRmtDropFrOutCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 55 1 D Network Frames Offered Above CIR Within EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciDropFrCirToEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 57 1 D Network Frames Dropped Above CIR Within EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRxFrNetDrop CirToEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 59 1 D Network Frames Offered Above EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciOfferedFrOverEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 61 1
8. Specifies whether the state of the Request To Send RTS circuits on the user data port will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE When the RTS off condition is detected CTS is deasserted LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Enable Interchange circuit CA ITU 105 RTS is monitored to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE Disable RTS is not monitored RTS is assumed to be asserted and data is being transmitted regardless of the state of the lead Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Possible Settings Local Disable Default Setting Disable Allows a local external DTE Loopback to be started or stopped via the port s attached data terminal equipment using the port s interchange lead LL ITU 141 Local The DTE attached to the port controls the local external DTE Loopback Disable The DTE attached to the port cannot control the local external DTE Loopback 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 3 29 Configuration Configuring the DSX 1 Interface Select DSX 1 to display or change the physical configuration options when a DSX 1 interface is installed see Table 3 6 Main Menu gt Configuration DSX 1 Table 3 6 DSX 1 Physical Interface Options 1 of 2 Interface Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the DSX 1 int
9. Type in enter the first letter s of a field value or command using the unit s character matching feature Example When configuring a port s physical characteristics with the Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks configuration option field selected possible settings include Disable Local DTPLB DCLB and Both entering d or D displays the first value starting with d Disable In this example entering dt or DT would display DTPLB as the selection Switch to the function keys area and select or enter a designated function key Example To save a configuration option change select Save S or s is the designated function key If a field is blank and the Message area displays valid selections press the spacebar the first valid setting for the field appears Continue pressing the spacebar to scroll through other possible settings March 2000 2 9 User Interface and Basic Operation 2 10 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration This chapter includes the following Basic Configuration Configuration Option Areas Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options Changing Configuration Options Saving Configuration Options Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units m Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock Setting Up for Trap Dial Out Setting Up an External Modem for Trap Dial Out Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out Setting Up Auto Configuratio
10. Alarm Indication Signal AIS Excessive Error Rate EER Yellow Alarm Strings ifString down No alarms exist e g Network T1 down due to yellow alarm ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp No alarms on the interface String ifString up Synchronous Data Port Supported by the media specific RS232 like MIB iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the port Alarm conditions include DTR off RTS off 2 Not DTR or RTS but link is down String ifString alarmString down e g Sync Data Port SO1P1 DTR and RTS down ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp No alarms on the port String ifString up 1 The DTR alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE supports the DTR lead state 2 The RTS alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE supports the RTS lead state March 2000 B 9 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults B 10 Table B 6 linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 2 of 2 Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Logical Link Sublayer Synchronous Data P
11. OFF FrameSaver unit is in a power on self test or there is a failure ALM Operational Alarm Fail Red ON FrameSaver unit has just been reset or an error or fault has been detected Error fault alarm conditions Alarm Indication Signal AIS m CTS Down DLCI Down DTR Down Exceeded Error Rate EER LMI Down Loss of Signal LOS Network Communication Link Down Out of Frame OOF Power Supply Failure Primary or Secondary Clock Failed Self Test Failed SLV Timeout Two Level 1 Users Accessing Device a Yellow Alarm Signal OFF No failures have been detected These alarms appear on the System and Test Status screen See Health and Status Messages for additional information TST Test Mode Yellow ON Loopback or test pattern is in progress initiated locally remotely or from the network OFF No tests are active March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 2 Network and DSX 1 Interface LEDs Label Indication Color What It Means SIG Signal Green ON A recoverable signal is present on the Network DSX interface OFF The signal cannot be recovered from the Network DSX interface An LOS condition exists OOF Out of Frame Yellow ON Atleast one OOF was detected during the sampling period OFF No OOFs were detected during the samp
12. Customer Configuration 1 An alternate set of configuration options that the customer can set up and store for future use Customer Configuration 2 Another alternate set of configuration options that the customer can set up and store for future use Default Factory Configuration A read only configuration area containing the factory default set of configuration options You can load and edit default factory configuration settings but you can only save those changes to the Current Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration option areas The Current Customer 1 and Customer 2 configuration option areas are identical to the Default Factory Configuration until modified by the customer March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options 9124 A2 LB20 00 To access and display configuration options load copy the applicable configuration option set into the edit area gt Procedure To load a set of configuration options for editing 1 From the Main Menu press the down arrow key so the cursor is on Configuration Press Enter to display the Configuration menu The Load Configuration From menu appears NOTE Loading a configuration with many DLCls from a unit s Customer Configuration 1 or 2 option area may take time Allow a minute or more for the file to be loaded Select the configuration option area from which you want to load configuration option
13. Port Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies level of user access privilege for an asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port If a login is required for the port the effective access level is determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the port or the user For example if the Port Access Level assigned is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only level 3 access will be permitted for the port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Level 1 Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring diagnostics and configuration The user can add change and display configuration options and perform device testing CAUTION Before changing the communication port s access level to Level 2 or 3 make sure that the Telnet Session Access Level is set top Level 1 and at least one Login ID is set to Level 1 Otherwise access will be lost If this occurs you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the configuration process again Level 2 Allows limited access and control of the device The user can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information Level 3 Allows limited access with mon
14. Session 3 57 Frame Delivery Ratio FDR 1 2 Frame Relay assigning timeslots configuring interface configuring system 3 18 Discovery 3 11 saving a mode change 3 13 DSOs Base Rate 3 42 statistics troubleshooting PVC problems 6 15 frames 3 52 FT Loopback 6 28 FTP 1 4 5 37 file transfers initiating a session limiting access 4 4 4 6 Login Required Max Receive Rate kbps 3 57 Session function keys G General LEDs options 3 22 SNMP management options Traps 3 60 generating reports glossary grouping elements for reports H hardware revision NAM HDLC errors frame relay statistics Health and Status messages history adding files installing files monitoring DLC hyperlink to more information highlighted text IN 4 I Identity displaying Ignore Control Leads 3 64 Inactivity Timeout 3 56 3 65 Initial Route Destination installation and setup Network Health installing Network Health 9 2 user history files interface user Interface Status Network Internal Transmit Clock Inverse ARP Invert Transmit Clock IP default destination 3 49 node information 3 48 Ping test 6 31 Validation NMS 3 58 IP Address 3 51 8 65 3 68 NMS number Node 3 49 IP addressing limiting SNMP access K keyboard keys keys keyboard screen function L Lamp Test LAN adapt
15. Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 Frame Relay DSOs Base Rate Possible Settings Nx64 Nx56 Default Setting Nx64 Selects the base rate for the DSOs allocated to frame relay on the network interface Display Conditions This option only appears for the network interface Nx64 The base rate is 64 kbps Nx56 The base rate is 56 kbps March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Manually Configuring DLCI Records 9124 A2 LB20 00 The Auto Configuration feature automatically configures DLCI Records and their PVC Connections DLC Records can also be created manually see Table 3 9 Main Menu Configuration Network Data Port DLC Records Typically DLCI Records only need to be configured when building Management PVCs between the NOC and the central site unit the unit automatically configures non management DLCI Records and PVC Connections Table 3 9 DLCI Record Options 1 of 3 DLCI Number Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the number for the DLCI in the DLCI record The parameter determines which DLCI record is used for transferring data on a particular frame relay interface DLCI numbers range from 0 to 1023 However the numbers 0 15 and 1008 1023 are reserved Entry of an invalid number results in the error message Value Out of Range 16 1007 If the DLCI number is part of a connection this field is re
16. TruePut Technology Using Frame Delivery Ratios FDR and Data Delivery Ratios DDR throughput within and above CIR as well as between CIR and EIR and above EIR can be measured precisely eliminating inaccuracies due to averaging These ratios are available through OpenLane SLV reports Frame Relay Aware Management Supports diagnostic and network management features over the frame relay network using the Annex A Annex D and Standard UNI User Network Interface LMI management protocol The unit s frame relay capability also supports Inband management channels over the frame relay network using dedicated PVCs Unique nondisruptive diagnostics CIR monitoring on a PVC basis Multiple PVCs on an interface Multiplexing management PVCs with user data PVCs Multiplexing multiple PVCs going to the same location onto a single network PVC Auto Configuration Provides the following automatic configuration features Frame Relay Discovery For automatic discovery of network DLCls and configuration of a user data port DLCI the PVC connection and a management PVC which is multiplexed with user data DLCls LMI Protocol Discovery For automatic configuration of the protocol being used by the network DLCI Deletion For automatic removal of configuration of unused DLCls from the unit s configuration and statistical databases CIR Determination For automatic recalculatio
17. Between CIR amp EIR Above EIR Total number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were dropped in transit The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 232 2 then the count starts over The SLV Delivery Ratio option see Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options must be enabled for these statistics to appear The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were above the committed information rate and were dropped in transit The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were within the committed information rate but were dropped in transit The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate and were dropped in transit The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were above the excess information rate and were dropped in transit 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 5 27 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 11 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 2 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Inbound Dropped Characters Above CIR Within CIR Between CIR amp EIR Above EIR Total number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were dropped in transit The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 232 2 then the count starts over The SLV Delivery Ratio option see Table 3 2 Service Leve
18. Correct the CIR setting so both units are configured the same Check the line s error rate the physical line quality Contact the service provider 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 6 15 Troubleshooting Tests Available The following tests are available to a FrameSaver SLV 9124 Test Menu Example main test 9124 II Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 TEST Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests Network Physical Tests Data Port Physical Tests DSxX 1 Physical Tests IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit PVC Tests menu selections are suppressed when no PVCs have been configured on the interface Check that both ends of the cables are properly seated and secured Tests can be commanded from the OpenLane 5 x management solution using its Diagnostic Troubleshooting graphical interface as well as from the menu driven user interface Test Timeout Feature A Test Timeout feature is available to automatically terminate a test as opposed to manually terminating a test after it has been running a specified period of time It is recommended that this feature be used when the FrameSaver unit is remotely managed through an inband data stream PVC If a test is accidently commanded to execute on the interface providing management access control is regained when the specified time period expires automatically terminating the test To
19. DLCls as soon as it powers up To recover from this problem edit a selected discovered DLCI or PVC connection manually if any DLCls or PVC Connections have been configured manually If only a local management PVC between the router and the FrameSaver unit has been configured select the desired Frame Relay Discovery Mode and Save the change The default discovery mode is 1MPort management DLCls multiplexed with data DLCls on Port 1 which creates two embedded DLCls EDLCls one EDLCI for Port 1 user data and another EDLCI for management data that is for each DLC discovered on the network a multiplexed network DLCI and a standard data port DLCI will be configured and connected and a Management PVC will be embedded in the network DLCI When LMI is active on the network interface and PVC status information with provisioned DLCI numbers is next received from the network the unit automatically saves the settings to the Current Configuration area Configuration options set by the selected discovery mode can be manually modified refined or deleted at any time using the Configuration menus No previously discovered and configured DLCls or cross connections will be removed unless authorized or Automatic Circuit Removal is enabled see Automatically Removing a Circuit Additional discovered DLCls will be configured according to the current Frame Relay Discovery Mode setting Selecting or changing the setting will not affect IP Add
20. March 2000 B 11 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults B 12 Table B 7 enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 2 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterpriseMissedSLV _ devFrExtDicilflndex SLV Timeout Error Event Down 16 devFrExt mib Threshold has been exceeded devFrExtDiciDici String devFrExt mib SLV down on ifString due to ea excessive SLV packet loss Total devFrExtDiciMissed SLVs devFrExt mib SLV packets lost is numLost enterpriseMissedSLV devLastTrapString SLV Timeout Error Event has Up 116 devHealthAndStatus been cleared mib String SLV up on ifString because SLV communication was reestablished Total SLV packets lost is numLost enterprisePrimary devLastTrapString Operating software has detected ClockFail 1 devHealthAndStatus that the primary clock source has mib failed enterprisePrimary ClockFailClear 101 String Primary clock failed Operating software has detected that the primary clock source is operational again String Primary clock restored enterprise RMON ResetToDefault 13 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib All RMON related option changes have been reset to their default values Default Factory Configuration settings have been reloaded returning RMON related options to their original settings String RMON database reset to defaults Ma
21. NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable For remote monitoring at sites where FrameSaver units are operating with NetScout Probes use the following ifName ifDescr and iflndex Table B 2 NetScout Interface Objects Information ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Frame Relay Logical Layer Frame Relay 1 Frame relay logical For the DTE side 1 Network link on the network RMON IN OUT Network T1 interface of FR DTE T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the DCE side RMON IN OUT Network T1 of FR SERVICE T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame Relay 3 Synchronous Data For the user side 3 Sync Data Port 1 RMON IN OUT Synchronous Port 1 Data Port of FR DTE Slot 1 Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side RMON IN OUT Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot 1 Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh RMON Logical Layer RMON Frame These values are OUT RMON IN 17 48 Relay Logical calculated ifName of the interface Interfaces For the DTE Forthe DCE DTE ifName of the interface calculated value 1 RMON Virtual These values are 65 512 Interfaces calculated based on the probe s internal circuit index circuit index 65 RMON Virtual These values are IN VIRTUAL PVC 513 1023 Logical calculated interface number Interfaces For the DTE DLCI number DTE virtual interfac
22. Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network port Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 6 9 Troubleshooting 6 10 Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 4 of 6 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do LOS at DSX 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 DSX 1 cable problem No signal being transmitted from the DTE Check that the DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends Check the DTE status LOS at Network 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the network interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 Network cable problem No signal is being transmitted at the far end FrameSaver unit T1 facility problem Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends Check far end FrameSaver unit status Contact your network provider Network Com Link Down The communication link for the COM port is down and the COM port is configured for Net Link Check the router connected to the COM port OOF at DSX 1 An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface Incompatible framing format between the DTE and the FrameSaver unit DSX 1 cabling proble
23. monitoring user history Number Priority Records Source statistics status 5 19 Traps on Interfaces 3 61 Type 3 43 domains and groups correcting verifying 8 5 download capability downloading determining when completed 5 40 MIBs and SNMP traps SLV alarms software 5 37 user history file DSX 1 adapter pin assignments assigning timeslots connector pin assignments interface LEDs setting up 3 30 signaling assignments 3 36 timeslot assignments trunk conditioning 9124 A2 LB20 00 EDLCI Destination 3 47 Source 3 46 EER at Network 5 15 6 7 LED linkDown trap EIA 232C COM Port connector EIR statistics elements DLCls Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCl 3 46 3 47 3 53 ending a session Enter Return key entering system information Enterprise Specific Traps enterprise specific traps B 11 equipment list Error Event LMI 3 18 3 41 Errors frame relay statistics Esc key ESF Line statistics 5 34 even parity 3 63 exception points Excess Burst Size Bits Excessive Error Rate linkDown trap Error Rate Threshold External Device controlling access Modem on Com Port options 3 67 Commands 3 67 set up for trap dial out Transmit Clock March 2000 IN 3 Index F faceplate FDR features field is blank empty file transfer FTP file transfer protocol
24. 3 29 Access Level 3 64 4 3 assignment clearing 3 39 bursting communication options 3 63 control leads LED Use 3 63 PPP Primary Clock Failed 5 16 6 11 Source 3 22 Primary Destination DLCI EDLCI Link Primary Frame Relay Link Primary Link RIP printed reports problem indicators product related documents Proprietary RIP 3 53 3 66 Protocol address resolution Link LMI Point to Point PPP 3 66 Routing Information RIP 3 53 3 66 Serial Line IP SLIP Simple Network Management SNMP 9124 A2 LB20 00 Index PVC availability connection status 5 21 connections 3 46 total number Loopback 6 20 Management 3 51 total number dedicated name 3 49 3 50 3 60 tests 6 19 troubleshooting problems 6 15 Q quality of service Quick Reference R ratios FDR and DDR rear panel remote loopbacks 6 27 6 29 units minimal configuration Repeater Loopback reports Network Health 9 7 resetting statistics 5 26 the unit unit default configuration options restoring communication with a misconfigured unit retrieving statistics Return Enter key revision software and hardware RFC 1213 and 1573 RFC 1315 RFC 1406 RFC 1604 RFC 1659 RFC 1757 RFC 2021 right arrow key RIP 1 3 3 15 3 66 RJ48C COM Port connector RLB RMON alarm and event defaults Specific Traps Traps 3 61
25. 6 29 Repeater 6 25 V 54 LOS at DSX 1 5 15 6 10 at Network 5 15 6 10 LED 5 4 5 5 linkDown trap Loss of Signal linkDown trap M Main Menu screen branch 2 4 making input selections Management and Communication options 3 48 General SNMP options OpenLane 5 0 Pvos 3 51 total number dedicated setting up local 3 14 SNMP troubleshooting link menu branches Configuration main path 2 5 selecting from Menus messages Device Health and Status 5 14 Self Test Results system System and Test Status Test Status DBM MIB access downloading support March 2000 IN 5 Index minimal remote configuration Mode changing Operating demos Test model number modem Health and Status messages setting up trap dial out modifying a login Monitor DTR Pattern RTS monitoring DLCI history data FrameSaver unit LEDs and control leads using NetScout Manager Plus Multiplexed N N1 N2 LMI Error Event N3 LMI Clearing Event DLCI 3 46 3 47 3 53 DLCI Type PVCs 6 21 LMI Status Enquiry 3 19 8 41 3 18 8 41 Name 3 51 1 or 2 Access Access Community navigating the screens Net Link Port Use NetOnly 3 11 NetScout Manager Plus NMS support NMS support Network cable pin assignments Com Link Down 5 15 6 10 configuring the interface DLCI
26. D Network Frames Dropped Above EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRxFrNetDrop OverEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 63 1 D DLCI EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D DLCI Inactive Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciStsInactiveSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Average Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 6 1 D Maximum Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyMax 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 8 1 D Latency Packet Size MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyPacketSz 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 B 25 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 History OID Cross Reference 4 of 4 Object ID OID 1 Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 2 1 D N Burst Upper Limit 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 3 1 D N Burst Octets 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 4 1 D N Burst Frames 1 5 MIB p
27. RFC 2021 Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps Paradyne standard and enterprise MIBs are available from the Paradyne World Wide Web site gt Procedure To access Paradyne MIBs 1 Access the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com 2 Select Technical Support 3 Select Management Information Base MIBs The download procedure may vary depending upon your browser or NMS application software Refer to your browser or NMS manual for additional download information B 2 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults System Group mib 2 This section provides the system description and system object identifier for the System Group for the FrameSaver 9124 unit which is an SNMPv1 MIB FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 The following is the system description sysDescr system 1 for the NMS subsystem in the FrameSaver 9124 unit PARADYNE T1 FrameSaver SLV Model 9124 II S W Release MM mm bb MM Major mm minor bb build format NAM CCA number hardware version in hhhh hhh format Serial number sssssss FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 The following is the system object identifier sysObjectID system 2 or OID for the NMS subsystem in the FrameSaver 9124 unit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 4 9 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 B 3 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Interfaces Group mib 2 Clarification for objects in the Interfaces Group as defined in RFC 15
28. Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default DLCI Inactive D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 oeeonds Tag devFrExtDlciStsInactive sional Secs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D Missing Latency D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 5 5 PSPSPS Tag devFrExtDiciMissedsLvs 19 MINS OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 23 1 D Rx FECNs D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs Rising 1 1 RFC 2115 1 min Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx BECNs D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs Rising 1 1 RFC 2115 1 min Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Congested Seconds D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs Rising 5 5 Tag devFrExtDIciSts hy CongestedSecs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 6 1 D Frames Dropped by D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs Rising 1 1 menor Tag devFrExtDiciNetDropFr emin OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area These alarms can be created during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created The
29. TCP Telnet limiting access 4 4 4 5 Session user interface options 9124 A2 LB20 00 Terminal Port Use 3 63 Test menu branch Mode 5 4 Status messages DBM 5 17 Tests aborting 6 18 available 6 16 Connectivity Data Channel Loopback 6 28 DTE Loopback 6 26 Duration Line Loopback 6 23 pattern 6 30 Payload Loopback 6 24 physical PVC PVC Loopback 6 20 Remote Line Loopback 6 27 6 29 Repeater Loopback Send Monitor Pattern starting or stopping Timeout 3 22 6 16 through PVC connections total number throughput time setting Timeout Inactivity 3 56 3 65 Test timeslot assignment status 5 23 timeslot assignments DSX 1 network timeslots 3 32 trademarks A Training A transferring data 5 41 Transmit Clock Invert 3 28 Source 3 28 Transmit Timing Trap Dial Out Disconnect Managers Number of 3 59 March 2000 IN 9 Index Traps authentificationFailure DLCI Enterprise Specific General Link Link Interfaces linkUp and linkDown RMON RMON Specific B 14 SNMP and dial out options standards supported warmStart Trend report 9 7 troubleshooting creating a management link device problems 6 13 frame relay PVC problems 6 15 management link tables 6 13 TruePut 1 2 TS Management Link Access Level access level 4 7 limiting Telnet a
30. The sections that follow provide pin assignments for each interface NOTE In the pin assignment tables of this appendix if the pin number is not shown it is not being used 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 C 1 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments COM Port Connector C 2 The following table provides the pin assignments for the FrameSaver 9626 unit s 25 position EIA 232C communication port connector Signal Direction Pin Shield GND 1 DCE Transmit Data TXD From DTE In 2 DCE Receive Data RXD To DTE Out 3 DCE Request To Send RTS From DTE In 4 DCE Clear To Send CTS To DTE Out 5 DCE Data Set Ready DSR From DTE In 6 Signal Ground GND 7 DCE Carrier Detect CD To DTE Out 8 DCE Data Terminal Ready DTR From DTE In 20 Pins 5 6 and 8 are tied together March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 LAN Adapter Converter and Cable 9124 A2 LB20 00 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments If connecting to a LAN order a plug to modular jack converter and a LAN Adapter cable The following shows the pin assignments for the DB25 plug to 8 position modular jack converter between the COM port and the 8 conductor LAN Adapter cable Feature No 3100 F 1 920 Custom 8 conductor cable with modular plugs on both ends between the converter and the LAN Adapter Feature No 3100 F2 910 Plug to Modular Jack Converter Cable Com Port 8 Position
31. data port March 2000 6 23 Troubleshooting Payload Loopback The Payload Loopback PLB loops the information received on the selected interface back to the network after it has passed through the receive and transmit framing section of the device Use the PLB to determine whether the problem is with the T1 facility or in the circuitry of the remote device Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests Payload Loopback Oth Framer er lt lt lt Interface 18 Interface i 97 15337 CAUTION This test may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted A PLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active m Line Loopback Repeater Loopback Send Remote Line Loopback or an active Monitor Pattern on this network interface Payload or Repeater Loopback on any other T1 interface with DSOs assigned to this network interface m Send FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on the synchronous data port 6 24 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Repeater Loopback 9124 A2 LB20 00 Troubleshooting The Repeater Loopback RLB loops data received from the data ports and the DSX 1 interface after the signal has passed through the framing circuitry Use RLB to ensure that all of the data is correct up to the point where it is sent over the int
32. 00 Configuration Basic Configuration Configuration option settings determine how the FrameSaver unit operates Use the FrameSaver unit s Configuration Edit Display menu to display or change configuration option settings The Configuration Edit Display menu of the FrameSaver 9124 is shown below Configuration Menu main config 9124 II Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 CONFIGURATION EDIT DISPLAY System Network DSx 1 Data Ports Time Slot Assignment PVC Connections Management and Communication Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save Changing an Auto Configuration setting can also change the FrameSaver unit s configuration See Setting Up Auto Configuration for additional information 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 3 3 Configuration Configuration Option Areas 3 4 The FrameSaver unit arrives with configured factory default settings which are located in the Factory Default Configuration option area You can find the default settings for configuration options in the m FrameSaver SLV 9124 Quick Reference Configuration Option Tables If the factory default settings do not support your network s configuration you can customize the configuration options to better suit your application Four configuration option storage areas are available Configuration Option Area Description Current Configuration The currently active set of configuration options
33. 1 min capability capability Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Tx DLCI Link D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs Rising 70 of link 65 of link Utilization RFC 2115 1 min capability capability Tag frCircuitSentOctets OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 B 21 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Object ID Cross References Numeric Order The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event information Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor When the threshold set for the monitored variable is exceeded an SNMP trap is sent and or a log entry is made This table is helpful in identifying alarm conditions being tracked when viewing the NetScout Custom History screen shown below which provides the OID instead of the alarm condition Elie Wie Forst iiSi Wed Gea di ETENEE RLA RALI o AITA EAAS BARIA LIDII MIE SANNT ESO We ee EPR ER MM See Table B 14 for an RMON history OID cross reference and Table B 15 for an RMON alarm OID cross reference B 22 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Ta
34. 255 255 000 Default IP Destination For models without an internal modem Possible Settings Default COM PVCname Specifies an IP destination to route data that does not have a specifically defined route Examples f the default IP network is connected to the communications port select COM f the default IP network is connected to a far end device over the management PVC named London for the remote device located in the London office select the PVC name London as defined by the Name configuration option Table 3 12 Management PVCs Options NOTE Ifthe link to the IP destination selected as the default route becomes disabled or down the unrouteable data will be discarded Make sure that the link selected is operational and if that link goes down change the default destination CAUTION Use care when configuring a default route to an interface that has a subnet route configured at a remote end where the NMS router LAN adapter terminal server etc is connected Communicating with an unknown IP address on the subnet will cause temporary routing loops which will last 16 iterations times the retry count None No default network destination is specified Unrouteable data will be discarded This is the recommended setting COM Specifies that the default destination is connected to the COM port Only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 3 17 Communication Port Options PVCname Specif
35. 3 Network Side Meaning DSX 1 Side E amp M idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an E amp M interface ABCD 0000 E amp M idle E amp M busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an E amp M interface ABCD 1111 E amp M busy FXOg idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXO Ground Start interface ABCD 1111 FXSg idle FXOg busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXO Ground Start interface ABCD 0101 FXSg busy FXOI idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXO Loop Start interface ABCD 0101 FXSI idle FXOl busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXO Loop Start interface ABCD 0101 FXSI busy FXSg idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXS Ground Start interface ABCD 0101 FXOg idle FXSg busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXS Ground St
36. 34 PIP File TANIS tocitnieudageewaieeeaiyebniy centre ed i048 eee 5 37 Upgrading System Software 0 00 c eee eee eee 5 39 Determining Whether a Download Is Completed 5 40 Changing SOWAS icadccetadicrcunanatineudomneaeasudeebedeud 5 40 Transfermg Collected Data ssrsnisicresisnicitieirsbrivsiinddi 5 41 March 2000 iii Contents 6 Troubleshooting Problem Indicators gic tce tt beet dieaie kadina eater aie 6 2 Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication 6 3 Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu 000 6 3 Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power 0005 6 3 Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit 6 4 Troubleshooting Management Link Feature 0 0005 6 5 LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature 0 20 00 c cece eee 6 5 Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface 6 6 PAM Shy sche AEE TAE TT E EESTE OTTE EVT ETETETT 6 7 Troubleshooting TADIS kosisrrridisnrds irsidir naoi kaidi hninibinnit 6 13 Device Provlems iacectacewiscpeiateeieireigennd dived ened 6 13 Frame Relay PVC Problems 0000e cece ee eeeeeees 6 15 Tests Available csdvete test tdyntcivddccembeed deme akii EEE 6 16 Test TIMGOUL Feature cir ddestadeatadodiadeadadabiaardadges 6 16 Starting and Stopping a TeSt isadcosicecsiddediaduniaedoiaednanene 6 17 ADOMINGIAU TOSS aiid sadinasdedsrtedadade sinned Sadaoiesaes 6 18 PYG T
37. 9124 Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 DSX 1 TO NETWORK 1 ASSIGNMENTS Page 2 of 2 SIGNALING AND TRUNK CONDITIONING Network 1 Side DSX 1 Side Network 1 Side DSX 1 Side Net1 01 E amp M busy D01 1 01 E amp M busy Net1 02 E amp M busy D01 1 01 E amp M busy Net1 03 E amp M busy D01 1 03 E amp M busy Net1 04 E amp M busy D01 1 04 E amp M busy Net1 09 None DO1 1 09 None Net1 10 None DO1 1 10 None Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save PgDn PgUp ClearAll FrAssign For easy movement between screens select the ErAssign function key to go directly to the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen Only those DSX 1 to Network assignments from page 1 are displayed on this page from left to right and top to bottom in ascending order by network and time slot March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration When a CGA condition LOS OOF or AIS is declared for a T1 interface the signaling bits being transmitted to the other T1 interface for the DSO are forced to idle for two seconds except for user defined patterns which are transmitted immediately This drops any call in progress The signaling bits are then forced to the selected state Busy or Idle and remain in this state until the CGA condition clears At this point the received signaling bits from the T1 interface which formerly had the CGA condition are passed through to the other T1 interface NOTE Trunk conditioni
38. 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 2 of 4 Message What It Indicates EER at Network 1 The error rate of the received network signal exceeds the currently configured threshold This condition only occurs if the network interface is configured for ESF framing This condition clears when the error rate falls below the threshold value which may take up to 15 minutes Link Down Administratively frame relay link The specified frame relay link has been disabled by the unit due to LMI Behavior conditions or LMI Protocol on another link is in a failed state This is not an alarm condition so System Operational appears as well LMI Discovery in Progress frame relay link 2 Local Management Interface protocol discovery is in progress to determine which protocol will be used on the specified frame relay link LMI Down frame relay link 2 The Local Management Interface s has been declared down for the specified frame relay link LOS at DSX 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 Possible reasons include DSX 1 cable problem No signal being transmitted from the DTE LOS at Network 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the network interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal
39. A linkUp trap indicates that the unit recognizes that one of its interfaces is active Use the Link Traps Interface and the DLCI Traps on Interface configuration options to specify which interface will monitor linkUp and linkDown traps messages Disable Does not send linkDown or linkUp trap messages Up Sends trap messages for linkUp events only Down Sends trap messages for linkDown events only Both Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events 3 60 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Table 3 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 3 of 4 Link Traps Interfaces Possible Settings Network DSX 1 T1s Ports All Default Setting All Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific trap messages These traps are not supported on the COM port Network Generates these trap messages on the network interface only DSX 1 For applicable T1 FrameSaver units generates these trap messages on the DSX 1 interface only T1s For applicable T1 FrameSaver units generates these trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on both the T1 network and DSX 1 interfaces Ports Generates these trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on the user data port only All Generates these trap messages for linkUp and enterpriseSpecific events on all interfaces except for the COM port that are applicable
40. Already in Use Two Telnet sessions are already in use when an attempt to access the menu driven user interface through the COM port is made IP addresses and logins of the users currently accessing the interface are also provided Wait and try again Contact one of the IP address user and request that they log off User Interface Idle Previously active session is now closed ended and access via the COM port is now available Log on to the FrameSaver unit Session has been ended due to timeout No action needed Value Out of Range CIR entered for the DLCI is a number greater than the maximum allowed Enter a valid CIR 0 1536000 Excess Burst Size entered for the DLCI is a number greater than the maximum allowed Enter a valid Excess Burst Size 0 1536000 DLCI Number entered is less than 16 or greater than 1007 Enter a valid number 16 1007 March 2000 5 11 Operation and Maintenance Status Information Status information is useful when monitoring the FrameSaver unit The following illustration shows the Status menu for the FrameSaver 9124 unit Status Menu main status 9124 II Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 STATUS System and Test Status LMI Reported DLCIs PVC Connection Status Network Interface Status Time Slot Assignment Status Performance Statistics Display LEDs and Control Leads Identity NOTE Status m
41. CIR bps 32000 32000 32000 32000 32000 MainMenu Exit An asterisk next to the DLCI indicates that the DLCI has been configured for the link DLCls without an asterisk have not been configured in the unit These DLCls pass through the unit transparently without being monitored and with no demultiplexing multiplexing of management diagnostics or user data being performed Only DLCls on the Net1 FR1 and Port 1 frame relay links appear on this screen nonconfigured DLCls on other links are discarded March 2000 5 19 Operation and Maintenance 5 20 Table 5 9 Network LMI Reported DLCIs Status Field Status What It Indicates DLCI 16 through 1007 Identifies the Local Management Interface reported DLCI numbers assigned to the selected interface the identifying number assigned to the path between two frame relay FrameSaver units ports DLCI statuses are listed in ascending order i e lowest number first Status Active Inactive Deleted 1 New LMI reported status of the DLCI Whether the DLCI is active capable of carrying data in the frame relay network Whether it is inactive in the frame relay network Whether it has been deleted by the frame relay network or Whether it has been created by the frame relay network CIR bps 0 1536000 Displays the committed information rate reported by the Stratacom switch CIR information only appears in th
42. Clear Clears the IP address for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the IP Address is all zeros the COM port uses the Node IP Address if one has been configured Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the COM port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 March 2000 3 65 Configuration Table 3 17 Communication Port Options 4 of 4 Link Protocol Possible Settings PPP SLIP Default Setting PPP Specifies the link layer protocol to be used Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link PPP Point to Point Protocol SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol RIP Po
43. DCLB on the network interface When a DCLB release sequence is received the DCLB is stopped Disable DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences are ignored V 54_ amp ANSI DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with either V 54 or ANSI T1 403 Annex B standard will be recognized and will control initiation and termination of a DCLB for the network frame relay link The actuate and release sequences do not need to match for example a DCLB started with a V 54 actuate sequence can be stopped with an FT1 release sequence ANSI Performance Report Messages Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether ANSI T1 403 compliance performance report messages PRMs are generated and sent to the network over the ESF facility data link every second Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable Generates and sends PRMs Disable Does not generate and send PRMs 3 26 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options 4 of 4 Excessive Error Rate Threshold Possible Settings 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Default Setting 10E 4 Sets the error rate threshold that determines when an EER condition is declared The excessive error rate is determined by the ratio of the number of CRC6 errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time D
44. Function Keys Area Specific functions that can be performed by pressing a specified key then pressing Enter Message Area System related information and valid settings for input fields in the lower left corner System and Test Status messages in the lower right corner 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 2 5 Keyboard Keys User Interface and Basic Operation Navigating the Screens You can navigate the screens by m Using keyboard keys Switching between the two screen work areas using function keys Use the following keyboard keys to navigate within the screen area Press To Ctrl a Move cursor between the screen area and the screen function keys area Esc Return to the previous screen Right Arrow on same screen row or Tab on any screen row Move cursor to the next field Left Arrow on same screen row or Ctrl k Move cursor to the previous field Backspace Move cursor one position to the left or to the last character of the previous field Spacebar Select the next valid value for the field Delete Del Delete character that the cursor is on Up Arrow or Ctrl u Move cursor up one field within a column on the same screen Down Arrow or Ctrl d Move cursor down one field within a column on the same screen Right Arrow or Ctrl f Move cursor one character to the right if in edit mode Left Arrow or Ctrl b Move cursor one character to the
45. LMI Trace Log LMI Trace Log 99 16345b A 3 Menu Hierarchy A 4 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults This appendix contains the following MIB Support Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps System Group mib 2 FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 m Interfaces Group mib 2 Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable m Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps Trap warmStart Trap authenticationFailure Traps linkUp and linkDown Traps enterprise Specific Traps RMON Specific RMON Alarm and Event Defaults Physical Interface Alarm Defaults Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area Object ID Cross References Numeric Order 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 B 1 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults MIB Support The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP Version 1 and has the capability of being managed by any industry standard SNMP manager and accessed by external SNMP managers using the SNMP protocol The following MIBs are supported MIB II RFC 1213 and RFC 1573 m Frame Relay DTEs MIB RFC 2115 DS1 E1 MIB RFC 1406 m RS 232 Like MIB RFC 1659 m Frame Relay Service MIB RFC 1604 Enterprise MIB RMON Version 1 MIB RFC 1757 RMON Version 2 MIB
46. Number of Managers Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit An IP address must be configured for each management system allowed to send messages Configure IP addresses in the NMS n IP Address configuration option 1 10 Specifies the number of authorized SNMP managers NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Provides the IP address of an SNMP manager that is authorized to send SNMP messages to the unit If an SNMP message is received from an unauthorized NMS and its IP address cannot be matched here access is denied and an authenticationFailure trap is generated If a match is found the type of access read only or read write is determined by the corresponding Access Type Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the NMS IP address Clear Fills the NMS IP address with zeros Access Type Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option
47. OID Cross Reference 2 of 4 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 5 4 8 1 2 1 Unavailable Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFreeRunUAS 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx Non octet Aligns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 13 1 2 1 4 H T N IP Top Listeners 1 6 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devRmon PTopNDstIP 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 13 1 2 1 6 H T N IP Top Talkers 1 6 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devRmonIPTopNSrcIP 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 3 1 D DLCI CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciFrCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 7 1 D Tx DEs MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDliciTxDE 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 8 1 D Tx BECNs MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrCircuitTxBECN 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D Tx Frames Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 1D Rx Frames Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDliciRxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Network Frames Lost MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciNetDropFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 22 1 D Rx DEs MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRxDE 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 37 1 D Network Frames Offered MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRmtOffFr
48. Password field of the Administer Logins screen does not match what was entered in the Password field Try again Contact your system administrator to verify your password Permission Denied Seen at an FTP A file transfer was attempted but the terminal User did not have See your system administrator Level 1 security to get your security level changed Wrong file was specified Try again entering the correct when the put command file with the put command was entered User attempted to Enter the put command upload a program file instead of a get command from the unit you can only transfer files to the unit not from it See Upgrading System Software Please Wait Command takes longer Wait until message clears than 5 seconds Resetting Device Please Wait Yes or y was entered in the Reset COM Port usage field of the System Paused menu No action needed March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 Table 5 5 Device Messages 5 of 5 Operation and Maintenance Message What It Indicates What To Do Test Active No higher priority health and status messages exist and a test is running Contact service provider if test initiated by the network Wait until the test ends and message clears Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path main test Stop the test from the same screen the test was started from User Interface
49. Plug to Plug to DB25 Plug Modular Jack Modular Jack LAN Adapter Tx Clock Unused Rx Data Signal Ground Tx Data DTR CD RTS Rx Clock DTR Tx Data Rx Data CTS Unused Signal Ground Frame Ground March 2000 98 16214 C 3 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Standard EIA 232 D Crossover Cable A standard crossover cable can be used to connect the COM port to an external modem The external modem must be configured so it is compatible with the FrameSaver unit See page C 5 to configure an external modem P1 P2 Pin 1 Plug Plug Pin 14 N Di v Pin 25 Pin 13 P1 Pin Pin P2 Chassis Ground 1 1 Chassis Ground TXD 2 2 TXD RXD 3 3 RXD RTS 4 4 RTS 5 5 DSR 6 6 DSR Signal Ground 7 7 Signal Ground CD RLSD 8 8 CD RLSD RXC RXC DTR DTR XTXC XTXC C 4 496 15180 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 B gt Procedure Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments To configure an external modem 1 Disconnect the asynchronous terminal from the standard cable See page C 4 for an illustration of the COM Port connection 2 Reconnect the crossover cable to the external modem 3 Enable auto answer on your modem and configure it to use the following LSD DSR CTS RTS and DTR control leads See the table below for AT DO command strings Use the following command string AT amp C0 amp D2 amp S0 amp
50. R1 DO SO 1 AT Command String To configure the modem to amp CO Force LSD on amp D2 Drop the connection when the unit drops DTR amp SO Force DSR on amp R1 Ignore RTS DO Force CTS on S0 1 Automatically answer incoming calls March 2000 C 5 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Port 1 Connector C 6 The following table provides the pin assignments for the 34 position V 35 connector to the DTE 34 Pin Signal ITU CT Direction Socket Shield 101 A Signal Ground Common 102 B Request to Send RTS 105 To DSU In C Clear to Send CTS 106 From DSU Out D Data Set Ready DSR 107 From DSU Out E Receive Line Signal Detector 109 From DSU Out F RLSD or LSD Data Terminal Ready DTR 108 1 2 To DSU In H Local Loopback LL 141 To DSU In L Transmit Data TXD 103 To DSU In P A S B Receive Data RXD 104 From DSU Out R A T B Transmit Signal Element Timing 113 To DSU In U A DTE Source XTXC or TT W B Receive Signal Element Timing 115 From DSU Out V A DCE Source RXC X B Transmit Signal Element Timing 114 From DSU Out Y A DCE Source TXC AA B Test Mode Indicator TM 142 From DSU Out NN March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Standard V 35 Straight through Cable A standard V 35 s
51. Rx Discards MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx Nonoctet Aligns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Rx CRC Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 Rx Illegal Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxllFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 Tx Total Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 Rx Total Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 28 1 Rx Overruns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxOverruns 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 29 1 Tx Underruns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTxUnderruns 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Total LMI Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotalLMIErrs B 28 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments This appendix shows the FrameSaver unit s rear panel and the pin assignments for the connectors interfaces and cables Rear Panel The following illustration shows the FrameSaver 9124 rear panel 00000000 Ee Crees Ie ol Cre O IRR 000000000 O PORT 1 DSX NET 99 16353
52. Select New and set the following configuration options as appropriate In the field Enter the Login ID ID of 1 to 10 characters Password Password from 1 to 10 characters Re enter password Password again to verify that you entered the correct password into the device Access Level Access level 1 2 or 3 Level 1 User can add change and display configuration options save and perform device testing Level 2 User can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information Level 3 User can only monitor and display status and configuration screens CAUTION Make sure at least one login is set up for Level 1 access or you may be inadvertently locked out NOTE See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 6 Troubleshooting should you be locked out inadvertently 3 Save your changes When Save is complete the cursor is repositioned at the Login ID field ready for another entry Security is enabled by the configuration options Login Required for the communication port modem port and Telnet Login Required or FTP Login Required for a Telnet or FTP Session 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 4 11 Security and Logins See Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about security configuration options Modifying a Login Logins are modified by deleting the incorrect logi
53. T1 Line Interface Cable Feature No 3100 F1 510 The T1 line interface cable is used in Canada as an interface between the FrameSaver unit s network connector and the T1 network interface The following shows pin assignments and the purpose of each Transmit Ring Transmit Tip RJ48C DA15P Plug Plug Unkeyed Receive Ring 1 Receive Tip White Orange Receive Ring Receive Tip Transmit Ring Transmit Tip C 8 March 2000 98 16215 9124 A2 LB20 00 DSX 1 Connector Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments If your model includes a DSX 1 interface the following table shows the signals and pin assignments for the 8 position modular DSX 1 interface The DSX 1 Adapter is required for this interface Function Circuit Direction Pin Number Receive Ring R1 From DTE 1 Receive Tip Ti From DTE 2 Shield 3 Transmit Ring R To DTE 4 Transmit Tip T To DTE 5 Shield 6 DSX 1 Adapter Feature No 9008 F 1 560 The DSX 1 adapter cable is used as an interface between the unit s DSX 1 connector and the DTE s DB15 interface The following shows pin assignments and the purpose of each 8 Position Modular Plug Unkeyed Receive Ring DB15 Socket Receive Tip Receive Tip Shield Transmit Ring Transmit Tip Shield Shield Transmit Ring Transmit Tip Shield 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 99 16216a C 9 Connecto
54. Uses its own internal time of day clock and provides synchronization information to other devices in the network based upon its own clock NOTE Only one device in the network should be configured as the SLV synchronization controller None Incoming timing information is ignored and no timing information is sent out This setting should only be used when network synchronization is not desirable or when a single unit connects multiple networks or network segments March 2000 3 21 Configuration Configuring General System Options Select General from the System menu to configure the general system configuration options see Table 3 3 Main Menu gt Configuration System General Table 3 3 General System Options 1 of 2 Test Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether or not loopback and pattern tests have a duration after which they are terminated automatically Enable All Loopback and Pattern tests have a timeout This setting is recommended when the FrameSaver unit is managed remotely through an in band data stream If the FrameSaver unit is accidently commanded to execute a disruptive test on the interface providing the management access control can be regained after the timeout expires terminating the test Disable Loopback and pattern tests must be manually terminated Test Duration min Possible Settings 1 120 Default Settin
55. access to customer profiles frame relay access facilities components and PVC components Add FrameSaver devices Create customer profiles Set up historical data collection Doon e w Set up SLV report filters for Web access to report data See the Quick Start Installation Instructions to learn how to perform these steps and for additional information March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices This chapter includes NetScout Manager Plus information as it relates to FrameSaver SLV devices It includes the following Before Getting Started Configuring NetScout Manager Plus Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network Verifying Domains and Groups Correcting Domains and Groups Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template Editing Alarms Adding SLV Alarms Manually Creating History Files Installing the User Defined History Files Monitoring a DLCI s History Data Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus Statistical Windows Supported Release 5 5 or higher of the NetScout Manager Plus software provides FrameSaver SLV specific support 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 8 1 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Before Getting Started Before getting started you need to copy some OpenLane directories to a NetScout Manager Plus user directory OpenLane provides these directories as a starting point for loading
56. after the frame relay interface is selected The DLCI must be defined for the link i e has a DLCI record and it must not be part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI NOTES DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank Clearing the Link also clears the DLCI 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number inclusive Primary EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is selected EDLCls identify individual connections within multiplexed DLCls that are unique to those DLCls Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI Use 1 62 to identify secondary EDLCls Use the primary EDLCI for customer data which has a higher utilization rate than management data with slightly less line overhead Display Conditions This option does not appear if the DLCI field does not reference a multiplexed DLCI NOTE Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI suppresses EDLCI field 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number inclusive Primary Link RIP Possible Settings None Proprietary Standard_out Default Setting For multiplexed DLCls Proprietary For nonmultiplexed DLCIs Standard_out Specifies which Routing
57. alarm is generated at the end of the interval Only one alarm per event per interval is generated The alarm condition persists until the event has been disarmed reset The event is disarmed when a falling threshold has been crossed and the rising threshold has not been crossed during an interval allowing the event to return to its original disarmed state 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 B 15 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Physical Interface Alarm Defaults This alarm only applies to the FrameSaver unit s network interface Table B 9 Network Physical Interface Alarm Defaults Rising Falling Tag dsx1TotalUASs OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 18 9 1 5 1 Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Unavailable D MIB DS1 E1 MIB RFC 1406 900 secs Rising 1 1 Seconds 15 mins in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained B 16 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults These alarms apply to the FrameSaver unit s frame relay link interfaces They are created during RMON initialization Table B 10 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 1 of 2 Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2
58. an unframed all ones signal AIS at Network 1 An Alarm Indication Signal AIS is received by the network interface AIS is an unframed all ones signal Possible reasons include Upstream FrameSaver unit is transmitting AIS keep alive signal The network is transmitting an AIS Auto Configuration Active Auto Configuration feature is active which allows automatic configuration and cross connection of DLCls as they are reported by the network LMI Back to Back Mode Active The operating mode has been configured for back to back operation Main Menu gt Control gt Change Operating Mode The FrameSaver unit can be connected to another FrameSaver unit without a frame relay switch between them This feature is useful for product demonstrations or for a point to point configuration using a leased line CTS down to Port 1 Device The user data port CTS control lead on the FrameSaver unit is off DLCI nnnn Down frame relay link 1 2 The DLCI for the specified frame relay link is down DTR Down from Port 1 Device The DTR control lead from the device connected to the user data port is deasserted 1 nnnn indicates a DLC number of 16 through 1007 2 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00
59. determines whether the FrameSaver device at the other end of the frame relay PVC is active This test stops automatically and can only be executed for circuit multiplexed PVCs To run a connectivity test on a link Main Menu gt Test gt Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests gt Connectivity Selecting Connectivity sends a frame to the FrameSaver unit at the other end of the PVC ARndTrip Time ms message appears in the Result column when a response is received within 5 seconds indicating that the FrameSaver unit at the remote end is alive operational and connected and the round trip RT time is shown in milliseconds ms with a resolution of 1 ms If a response is not received within 5 seconds No Response appears in the Result column March 2000 6 21 Troubleshooting Physical Tests A FrameSaver 9124 unit s physical tests screen for the network interface is shown below Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests Data Port Physical Tests DSX 1 Physical Tests Physical Tests Screen Example 9124 II 5 26 1999 23 32 main test network Device Name Node A NETWORK 1 PHYSICAL TESTS Test Command Status Results Local Loopbacks Line Loopback Inactive Payload Loopback Inactive Repeater Loopback Inactive Remote Loopbacks Send Line Loopback Inactive Pattern Tests Send user defined 0a0a Active 00 Errors 99999 Monitor user defined 0a0a Active i 00 Errors 99999 Ctrl a to access thes
60. display or change the DLCl s committed burst size Display Conditions This option only appears when Committed Burst Size is set to Other Excess Burst Size Bits Specifies the maximum amount of data in bits that the network may accept beyond the CIR without discarding frames Be Possible Settings 0 1536000 Default Setting 1472000 Allows you to display or change the DLCl s excess burst size 3 44 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Table 3 9 DLCI Record Options 3 of 3 DLCI Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting High Specifies the relative priority for data received on the DLCI from an attached device also known as quality of service All data on Port 1 is cut through as long as there is no higher priority data queued from another user port The DLCI priority set for an interface applies to data coming into that interface For example the priority set for DLCls on Port 1 applies to data coming into Port 1 from the attached equipment such as a router Display Conditions This option is not available for the network interface Low Data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Data configured for the DLCI has medium priority High Data configured for the DLCI has high priority Outbound Management Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting Medium Specifies the
61. feet 0 133 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 133 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE 133 266 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 266 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE 266 399 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 399 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE 399 533 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 533 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE 533 655 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 655 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE Send All Ones on DSX 1 Failure Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether action is taken when a valid signal cannot be recovered for the DSX 1 LOS continuous OOF or AIS Enable Sends all ones on the DSO channels allocated to the DSX 1 interface in the event of an LOS AIS or continuous OOS condition on the DSX 1 interface Disable No action is taken when a signal fails on the DSX 1 interface The data received is passed through the network interface channels unchanged March 2000 3 31 Configuration Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections The system allows you to assign data paths between the various interfaces to share the T1 network Assuming that the DSX 1 interface is enabled you can make the following cross connection assignments m Frame relay links to the network interface time sl
62. gt Procedure To limit SNMP access through IP addresses Select the SNMP NMS Security options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt 1 SNMP NMS Security 2 Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate 3 4 10 To Set the configuration option Enable IP address checking NMS IP Validation to Enable Specify the number between 1 and 10 of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit Number of Managers to the desired number Specify the IP address es that identifies the SNMP manager s authorized to send SNMP messages to the unit NMS n IP Address to the appropriate IP address Specify the access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validates is performed Access Level to Read or Read Write Save your changes March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Security and Logins See Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about SNMP NMS Security configuration options Creating a Login A login is required if security is enabled Up to six login ID password combinations can be created using ASCII text and each login must have a specified access level Logins must be unique and they are case sensitive B gt Procedure To create a login record 1 Select Administer Logins Main Menu gt Control gt Administer Logins 2
63. integrating OpenLane with the OpenView Web interface March 2000 7 1 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System Instructions for installing Paradyne s OpenLane Service Level Management SLM System can be found in the following documents OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for UNIX Quick Start Installation Instructions OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for Windows NT Quick Start Installation Instructions See Product Related Documents in About This Guide for document numbers Select the appropriate document In addition to installation instructions these documents include instructions for Starting and stopping the OpenLane Web and database services Accessing the OpenLane application m Adding a FrameSaver device Adding a Customer ID The OpenLane SLM System has an extensive Help system For additional information refer to the following sources For UNIX users Refer to the readme txt file for distributed infrastructure details and the online Help for operational details For Windows NT users Refer to the online Help Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support 7 2 With the OpenLane SLM system s extensive online Help system the application is self documenting and you have access to the most current system information B gt Procedure To set up FrameSaver SLV support 1 Start the OpenLane services then access the application 2 Enter a Customer ID for
64. left if in edit mode Ctrl l Redraw the screen display clearing information typed in but not yet entered Enter Return Accept entry or when pressed before entering data or after entering invalid data display valid options on the last row of the screen March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 User Interface and Basic Operation Function Keys 9124 A2 LB20 00 All function keys located in the lower part of the screen see the example on page 2 5 operate the same way throughout the screens They are not case sensitive so upper or lowercase letters can be used interchangeably These keys use the following conventions For the screen Select function And press Enter to Morm MainMenu Return to the Main Menu screen Eore Exit Terminate the menu driven user interface session Norn New Enter new data Ooro Modify Modify existing data Lor Delete Delete data Sors Save Save information Rorr Refresh Update screen with current information Corc ClrStats Clear network performance statistics and refresh the screen Variations include ClrSLV amp DLCIStats for clearing SLV and DLCI statistics ClrLinkStats for clearing frame relay link statistics Uoru PgUp Display the previous page Dord PgDn Display the next page March 2000 2 7 2 8 User Interface and Basic Operation Selecting from a Menu B gt Procedure To select from a menu 1 Tab or p
65. off at the same time every 1 2 second during execution of the test When the test is stopped the LEDs are restored to their normal condition Main Menu gt Test gt Lamp Test If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled and a Test Duration is set the Lamp Test stops when the test duration expires See Test Timeout Feature for additional information 6 32 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices This chapter includes OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices m Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices 9124 A2 LB20 00 Paradyne s OpenLane Service Level Management SLM system supports all FrameSaver and FrameSaver SLV devices with the following features m Web and database services m Web access to health and status information Web access to real time as well as historical graphs and reports m Web access to SLV reports m On demand polling of FrameSaver devices SNMP polling and reporting m Web based diagnostic tests end to end PVC loopbacks connectivity and physical interface tests Basic device configuration including RMON alarm and threshold configuration Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery of SLV devices with their SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled m Easy firmware downloads to an entire network or parts of the network Device reset capability HP OpenView adapters for
66. port or network interface can be selected The utility captures any LMI packets sent or received and writes them to a data file called Imitrace syc in the system s data directory so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for analysis The LMI Trace Log also provides access to captured packet information See Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface for additional information on this feature B gt Procedure To use this utility 1 Select the LMI Packet Capture Utility Main Menu gt Control gt LMI Packet Capture Utility 2 Select an enabled frame relay link or Capture Interface either Net1 FR1 or Port 1 3 Start packet capture While capturing data the status is Active Packets in Buffer indicates the number of packets that have been captured Up to 8000 packets can be held When the buffer is full the oldest packets will be overwritten 4 To stop the utility press Enter The field toggles back to Start 5 Upload the data file holding the collected packets to a diskette so the information can be transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for debugging decoding See Transferring Collected Data in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance for additional information about this feature 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 6 5 Troubleshooting Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface The twelve most recent LMI events are stored in the trace log Once the
67. records options Health Concord reports Initiated LLB Initiated PLB interface LEDS interface options reference time latency timeslot assignments IN 6 3 19 3 41 Network Health installation and setup Network Initiated DCLB NMS IP Address 3 58 3 59 4 10 IP Validation OpenLane management solution SNMP security options Node IP Address 3 49 Subnet Mask Node IP configuration option tables NSP Number of Managers Trap Managers 3 59 O odd parity OID object identification user history a cross reference numeric order B 23 B 27 OK LED 5 4 5 5 OOF at DSX 1 or Network 5 15 6 10 LED linkDown trap OpenLane SLM support OpenLane 5 operating changing mode for demos 3 16 operation organization of this document Out of Frame linkDown trap Out of Sync message 6 15 6 21 Outbound Management Priority P packet capture uploading data 5 41 utility packets Parity Password patents A pattern send monitor interior tests 6 30 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Payload Loopback performance statistics 5 25 6 2 clearing Performance Wizard copying directory physical data port options DSX 1 3 30 tests 6 22 pin assignments COM port to LAN cables Port 1 V 35 connector T1 line interface cable T1 network cable V 35 crossover cable Ping test 6 31 PLB Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks
68. relay element discovery as a WAN element type 2 Enter the IP Addresses of the SLV units to be located and the Community String Community Name in the FrameSaver unit The Community String is case sensitive 3 Select the Discover button The Discover dialog box closes and the Discovering dialog box opens showing the results of the discovery process A message indicates the number of elements discovered and the number of existing elements updated when the discovery process is complete Depending upon the number of units entered and the size of your network it could take anywhere from a few minutes to an hour or longer to discover all elements in the network See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional information and to learn how to schedule automatic element discovery updates to the database 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 9 3 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Configuring the Discovered Elements Network Health sets the speed for discovered elements when it polls the unit for the first time For a FrameSaver SLV unit the speed set would be the unit s CIR No additional configuration should be required However you should verify that all appropriate information has been retrieved NOTE If an SLV unit does not have CIR configured or if it is not configured correctly Network Health sets the unit s CIR to 0 kbps For this reason you should reconfigure the units CIR before Networ
69. setup of Concord s Network Health application so reports can be created for FrameSaver units and identifies those reports that apply to FrameSaver units Menu Hierarchy Contains a graphical representation of how the user interface screens are organized SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Identifies the MIBs supported and how they can be downloaded describes the unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features and describes the RMON specific user history groups and alarm and event defaults Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Shows the rear panel tells what cables are needed and provides pin assignments for interfaces and cables Technical Specifications Equipment List Lists key terms acronyms concepts and sections March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 About This Guide Product Related Documents 9124 A2 LB20 00 Document Number Document Title FrameSaver SLV Documentation 9124 A2 LN10 FrameSaver SLV 9124 Installation Instructions 9124 A2 LL10 FrameSaver SLV 9124 Quick Reference Paradyne OpenLane NMS Documentation 7800 A2 GZ41 OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for UNIX Quick Start Installation Instructions 7800 A2 GZ42 OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for Windows NT Quick Start Installation Instructions NetScout Documentation 2930 170 NetScout Probe User Guide 2930 610 NetScout Manager Plus User Guide 2930 620 NetScout Manager Plus amp
70. specific event has occurred Supported enterprise specific traps are listed below Table B 7 enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 1 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterpriseCIR devFrExtDicilflndex CIR has changed due to the LMI 9124 A2 LB20 00 Change 15 devFrExt mib report LMI Protocol is set to a devErExtDlciDici prea and the network s CIR devFrExt mib String z P EE CIR on ifString changed to devFrExt mib CIR bps devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib enterpriseConfig devLastTrapString Configuration has been changed Change 6 devHealthAndStatus via the menu driven user mib interface an SNMP Manager or auto configuration after 60 seconds has elapsed without another change String Device configuration change enterpriseDLCI devFrExtDicilflndex The DLCI has been deleted The delete 17 devFrExt mib network no longer supports the devFrExtDlciDIci DLCI and it was removed devFrExt mib Strings devLastTrapString ows deletediby Auto DLEI devHealthAndStatus i enterpriseDLCI mib DLCI Status is set to Inactive the Down 11 DLCI is down Strings ifString down Due to LMI or physical failure ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown enterpriseDLCIUp 1 2 DLCI Status is set to Active DLCI is up again String ifString up
71. ted ti cadparararintsin tenia nno aig sie iii a Dir 8 4 Verifying Domains and Groups iscasicceuss cance tacks 22 drr inni 8 5 Correcting Domains and Groups 0ec cece eee eee 8 6 Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template 002222 0 0 8 8 Eding AlAWNS i14 2 cccnadwieeor ad oder neared again ook R eae ee 8 9 Adding SLV Alarms Manually 20000 cc eeee eee eee 8 11 Creating History Files so Saad ocenssoe dicated donna saie neni enne e 8 13 Installing the User Defined History Files 00 8 15 Monitoring a DLCl s History Data 0 000 e eee 8 16 Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus 8 18 m Statistical Windows Supported 0 000 eee eee eee 8 20 9 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Installation and Setup of Network Health 002222 0 00 9 2 m Discovering FrameSaver Elements 0000ceeee eee eens 9 3 Configuring the Discovered Elements 000eee eee eens 9 4 m Grouping Elements for Reports 0000 e eee ee eee eee 9 5 E Generating Reports fora Group 002 cece cece eee eee 9 6 About Service Level Reports 00 0 cece eeeee eee eae 9 6 About At a Glance Reports 002 cece cence eee eae 9 6 Aboul TIONG REPONS 4 icgcuciicddthbadhdacidhoadieiviaddiedtciad Erhi wihad ox 9 7 PHMECINGDONS 4cdcch ioscedcnis Ges adednarmeeeerce eran gure 9 7 m Reports Applicable
72. the clock supplied by the FrameSaver unit on interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing DCE Source TXC is phase inverted with respect to the clock used to time the incoming Transmitted Data TD Auto The port will check the clock supplied by the DCE on TXC on this port If necessary the port will automatically phase invert the clock with respect to the transmitted data Enable Phase inverts the TXC clock Use this setting when long cable lengths between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE are causing data errors Disable Does not phase invert the TXC clock Monitor DTR Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the state of the DTE Ready DTR circuit on the user data port will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE When the DTR off condition is detected an alarm is generated LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Enable Interchange circuit CD ITU 108 1 2 DTR is monitored to determine when valid data is sent from the DTE Disable DTR is not monitored DTR is assumed to be asserted and data is being transmitted regardless of the state of the lead March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Table 3 5 Data Port Physical Interface Options 2 of 2 Monitor RTS Control Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable
73. to SLV Devices 0 00 0 cece eee eee 9 7 A Menu Hierarchy My GAS de cscs vin EA E N A A E OE ET E area S E PT E A 1 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults MIB SUPPO san scarier ses candracr Pats vastus braids dca stated a i E B 2 Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps 200220e eee eee eee es B 2 System Group MID Z cigs santerangesedoniederepheadareuse Paws B 3 FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr System 1 22 00e eee B 3 FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 0005 B 3 Interfaces Group Mib 2 cic cicacacsten oiimavoradarenaocveesaeaads B 4 Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable B 4 NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table iffable B 5 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 v Contents m Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps 0000ee eee eens B 6 Map warmmta fac cGihreccachcees dacicuedediend ead baniaeacenesd 9 Sib sadee k B 7 Trap avinenticanronRalwre lt cdcisevitiieiebeaissdeiaatedsacee B 7 Traps slinkUp and IINKDOWN cid 0sa05454 nder acca didi Sande dante B 8 Traps nterptise Speciie 2 4ccccek ee kien B 11 Traps AWON Specie lt cshcuinaGsecerinderteneeienernencess B 14 a RMON Alarm and Event Defaults 00 0c cece eee B 15 Physical Interface Alarm Defaults 0000 cece eens B 16 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 00 cece eee B 17 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area 0202 0
74. to the FrameSaver model DLCI Traps on Interfaces Possible Settings Network Ports All Default Setting All Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp and linkDown trap messages for individual DLCls These traps are only supported on the frame relay interfaces Network Generates these trap messages on DLCls for the network interface only Ports Generates these trap messages for DLCls on a user data port only All Generates these trap messages on all frame relay interfaces RMON Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether remote monitoring traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s RMON traps are typically sent as a result of the Alarms and Events Groups of RMON1 when a selected variable s configured threshold is exceeded Enable Sends trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded Disable Does not send trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded Trap Dial Out Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether SNMP trap messages initiate a call automatically If the call cannot be completed and the Call Retry option is set to Enable the SNMP trap message is held queued until the call completes to either the Alarm or alternate directory Enable Automatically calls the phone number contained in the Control menu s Modem Call Directories Directory Number A Alarm Disable Auto
75. user history collection March 2000 IN 7 Index router setting up to receive RIP router independence 1 3 3 18 Routing Information Protocol RIP 3 66 running reports RXD control lead 5 6 S Sampling SLV Inband and Interval saving configuration options screen area function keys area how to navigate scrolling through valid selections Secondary Clock Failed 5 16 6 11 Source 3 23 security 1 2 P 1 2 2 3 6 4 1 SNMP NMS options 3 58 selecting a field from a menu Self Test Results messages Send All Ones on DSX 1 Failure 3 31 and monitor test pattern Pattern 6 20 serial number NAM Service A service level management reports 9 6 verification configuring 3 20 statistics 5 27 verifier SLV ae provider management control connectivity Session Access Level 3 56 H 5 4 7 ending starting Set DE setting Date amp Time system clock 3 8 date and time IN 8 March 2000 setting up auto configuration external modem local management 3 14 service provider connectivity SNMP trap managers 3 58 so router can receive RIP SIG LED 5 5 SLA SLIP SLM 1 1 OpenLane SLY service level verifier 1 1 configuring 3 20 Delivery Ratio 3 20 DLCI Down on Timeout Packet Size 3 21 performance statistics reports Sample Interval secs 3 20 Synchronization Role 3 21 Timeout E
76. with the OpenView Web interface Being Web based the OpenLane system provides Web access to the data contained in the database to provide anytime anywhere access to this information via a Web browser Some of the OpenLane SLM system s features include Real time performance graphs provide exact performance measurement details not averages which can skew performance results of service level agreement SLA parameters Historical SLV graphs provide service level management historical reports so frame relay SLAs can be verified Diagnostic troubleshooting provides an easy to use tool for performing tests which include end to end PVC loopback connectivity and physical interface tests Basic configuration allows you to configure FrameSaver devices and set RMON alarms and thresholds Network DLCI Circuit IDs can also be assigned Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery allows all SLV devices with their SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled to be discovered automatically along with their PVCs A FrameSaver unit can be reset from the OpenLane system Firmware downloading provides an easy to use tool for downloading to an entire network or a portion of the network On demand polling of FrameSaver devices and SNMP polling and reporting are available March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 About the FrameSaver SLV 9124 NetScout Manager Plus and NetScout Probe Support Provi
77. 0 1536000 Default Setting 64000 Determines the data rate for the DLCI that the network commits to accept and carry without discarding frames the CIR in bits per second Entry of an invalid rate causes the error message Value Out of Range 0 x where x the maximum line rate available on the port 0 1536000 Specifies the network committed data rate Te Possible Settings 1 65535 Default Setting Read Only Displays the DLCl s calculated value of its committed rate measurement interval Tc in milliseconds This value is calculated based upon the settings for the Committed Burst Size Bc Bits and CIR bps options Committed Burst Size Bc Bits Possible Settings CIR Other Default Setting CIR Specifies whether the DLCI s committed burst size will follow the CIR or whether it will be entered independently This value is the maximum amount of data that the service provider has agreed to accept during the committed rate measurement interval Tc CIR Uses the value in the CIR bps option as the committed burst size Bc The Bc and excess burst size Be options are updated when a CIR update is received from the network switch Other Allows you to specify the committed burst size for the DLC When Other is selected the Bc and Be values must be manually entered and maintained as well Bc Possible Settings 0 1536000 Default Setting 64000 Allows you to
78. 00 9 1 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices For additional information about installing accessing and managing FrameSaver SLV devices through Concord s Network Health and for information about applicable reports refer to Network Health Installation Guide to help you install the application Network Health User Guide to help you get started using the application Network Health Reports Guide to help you understand and use Frame Relay reports Network Health Traffic Accountant Reports Guide to help you understand and use Traffic Accountant reports Installation and Setup of Network Health Refer to the Network Health Installation Guide for installation instructions and follow the instructions applicable to your network platform Once Network Health is installed you need to set up the application so it will support FrameSaver units Each Network Health application provides a different set of functions called a module Each module used requires a separate license to gain access to those features and functions Make sure you license the Poller application so you can poll SLV units and collect data To use this application 1 Discover network elements units and interfaces in the network 2 Configure the Network Health applications then save them 3 Organize elements into groups for reporting purposes 4 Set up and run reports Setup and operation information is contained in the Network Health Us
79. 0e ee eeee B 19 DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area 0000000 B 20 m Object ID Cross References Numeric Order 222 0008 B 22 C Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Meal Panel tacooc nereesacount premio ata eteetacaes eet ones os C 1 COM Pont GoOnetioh scccc lt centenecapdoensaeondden nese iier ha C 2 LAN Adapter Converter and Cable 2 0 00 cee ee eeee C 3 Standard EIA 232 D Crossover Cable 00 annann C 4 E Pon ICOnnmGCiON sai ied ceri ahaa raded eaaa aaa C 6 Standard V 35 Straight through Cable 0022 eae C 7 Standard V 35 Crossover Cable r isirsisrrsisirsidirrieirpidi C 7 11 Network Cable Feature No 3100 F1 500 00 C 8 Canadian T1 Line Interface Cable Feature No 3100 F1 510 C 8 E DSX Connecior iach icawijadiiiadeniddiiaebbidd ida Sbia ka C 9 DSX 1 Adapter Feature No 9008 F1 560 C 9 D Technical Specifications E Equipment List E EQUIPMENT top2cdcteniotemediaiiieeiieebideaded eedeiae be edad E 1 EEEo E E ideas ANEA AE TE E EE E E 2 Index vi March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 About This Guide Purpose and Intended Audience Document Organization 9124 A2 LB20 00 This document contains information that applies to the Model 9124 FrameSaver Service Level Verifier SLV unit It is intended for system designers engineers administrators and operators You must be familiar with the functional operat
80. 17 Annex D March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Table 3 8 Interface Frame Relay Options 2 of 3 LMI Parameters Possible Settings System Custom Default Setting System Allows you to use the system LMI options or to set specific LMI options for this interface System Use system LMI options see Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options Custom Use the following options in this table to configure LMI parameters LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 3 Configures the LMI defined N2 parameter which sets the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link before an error is reported Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies the maximum number of errors LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 1 Configures the LMI defined N3 parameter which sets the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies how many error free messages it will take to clear the error event LMI Status Enquiry N1 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 255 Default Setting 6 Configures the LMI defined N1 parameter which sets the number of status enquiry polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a fu
81. 3 32 PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Service Level Verification DLCI Frame Relay ESF Line Clear All Statistics Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 5 25 Operation and Maintenance Clearing Performance Statistics Performance statistics counters can be reset to the baseline when using a directly connected asynchronous terminal and your security Access Level is Level 1 This feature is useful when troubleshooting problems Statistic counters are not actually cleared using this feature True statistic counts are always maintained so SLAs can be verified and they can be viewed from an SNMP NMS However since statistics can be cleared locally the statistics viewed via the menu driven user interface may be different from those viewed from the NMS gt Procedure To clear all statistics Performance Statistics Clear All Statistics B gt Procedure To clear specific sets of statistics m Use the ClrSLV amp DLClIStats function key to reset the SLV and DLCI performance statistic counters for the currently displayed DLCI from one of the following screens Performance Statistics Service Level Verification Performance Statistics gt DLC m Use the ClrLinkStats function key to reset the frame relay link performance statistics Performance Statistics Frame Relay m Use the ClrNearStats or ClrEarStats function key to reset all near end or all far end Extended SuperFra
82. 35 0336 1431 9008 F 1 550 connects COM Port to external device DB25 to RJ48 14 feet 4 3 meters DSX 1 Adapter Cable 035 0386 0031 9008 F 1 560 RJ48C to DB15 1 foot 0 3048 meters E 2 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Index Numbers 55 hexadecimal test pattern 6 20 6 21 A aborting tests 6 18 Access Dial In 3 67 Name 3 54 Type 3 58 Access Level 4 10 4 11 assigning Port security Session 3 56 adding SLV units to network Als alarm condition at DSX 1 or Network LED linkDown trap Alarm Fail 5 4 adding manually 8 11 conditions editing LED is lit RMON defaults B 15 using template ALM LED Alternate Dial Out Directory IP Adaress 3 68 software revision Subnet Mask Annex A and D LMI Protocol ANSI Performance Report Messages ANSI T1 403 Annex B FT1 Channel Loopback ARP inverse assign DSX 1 timeslots 3 34 frame relay timeslots timeslots and cross connections 9124 A2 LB20 00 assigning community names and access levels AT commands At a Glance report authentificationFailure trap Auto Configuration Active 5 14 setting up 3 10 availability LMI and PVC B back door access when locked out Back to Back Mode Active 5 14 operation setting up 3 16 Backspace Bo 3 44 Be 3 44 Bit Stuffing blank field value branches menus bursting port C Call Directories Call Retr
83. 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Invalid Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxllFrames 15 mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 Short Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort S mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 1 Long Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong eS anins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 Rx Discards D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards Tine OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 Tx Discards D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkTxDiscards 13 mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 14 1 Rx Total Errors D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 15 mins in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 10 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 2 of 2 Tag devFrExtLinkTotal LMIErrs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OI
84. 73 and RFC 1213 which is an SNMPv1 MIB is provided in this section Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable The following table provides the ifName for each interface type the ifDescr and the iflndex that Paradyne has assigned to each Table B 1 Paradyne Interface Objects Information ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Physical Layer Network T1 T1 network interface Network T1 T1 FR NAM 101001001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh DSX 1 T1 DSX 1 interface DSX 1 T1 T1 FR NAM 101002001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh Sync Data Port Synchronous Data Synchronous Data Port Slot 1 101003001 S01P1 Port 1 Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh COM Communications port COM Port T1 FR NAM 101004001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame Relay Logical Layer FR UNI Frame relay logical For the DTE side 101015001 link on the T1 network Network T1 of FR DTE interface T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the DCE side Network T1 of FR SERVICE T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame relay logical For the user side 101016001 link on the Synchronous Data Port 1 Synchronous Data Port of FR DTE Slot 1 Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot 1 Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh B 4 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults
85. 8 These traps are supported on the following interfaces Network DSX 1 and synchronous data ports Physical sublayer interfaces Frame relay logical link layer interfaces Table B 5 linkUp and linkDown Traps Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause linkDown A failure in one of the A failure in one of the communication interfaces communication interfaces has has occurred occurred linkUp One of the failed One of the failed communication communication interfaces is interfaces is up and operational up and operational Their linkUp and linkDown variable bindings are in Table B 6 Physical and logical sublayers are represented by the entry in the MIB II Interfaces Table It is supported by a combination of the Frame Relay Extension MIB and either the Frame Relay Services MIB or the Frame Relay DTEs MIB March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 Table B 6 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 1 of 2 Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Physical Sublayer Network DSX 1 Supported by the media specific DS1 MIB iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the interface Alarm conditions include Loss of Signal LOS or far end loss of signal Out of Frame OOF
86. 9124 A2 LB20 00 About the FrameSaver SLV 9124 This chapter includes the following m SLM Overview m FrameSaver SLV 9124 Features SLM Overview The Service Level Management SLM Solution consists of m FrameSaver SLV units m OQOpenLane SLM system NetScout Manager Plus application m Standalone NetScout Probes if needed This solution provides increased manageability monitoring and diagnostics so customers can identify problems more efficiently troubleshoot those problems faster and maximize their network to control costs It is also compatible with Concord Communication s Network Health software FrameSaver SLV Service Level Verifier 9124 units operate with other FrameSaver devices and when teamed with multinationally based FrameSaver devices in multinational applications provides a complete global frame relay management solution 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 1 1 About the FrameSaver SLV 9124 FrameSaver SLV 9124 Features 1 2 The FrameSaver SLV 9124 unit provides the following features Intelligent Service Level Verification Provides accurate throughput latency and availability measurements to determine network performance and whether service level agreements SLAs are being met along with SLA reporting SLA parameter thresholds can be configured to provide proactive notification of a developing network problem Security Provides multiple levels of security to prevent unauthorized access to the unit
87. A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Transferring Collected Data SLV user history statistics and LMI packet capture data can be uploaded to an NMS or a Network Associates Sniffer using FTP which is faster than other methods The rate at which the data file is transferred is the rate set by the FTP Max Receive Rate Kbps option see Table 3 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options in Chapter 3 Configuration NOTE Use your NMS application to FTP and view transferred statistics and packet data the data files are not in user readable format LMI packet capture data can also be viewed via the LMI Trace Log see Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface in Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for additional information B gt Procedure To retrieve data 1 Initiate an FTP session to the device from which SLV statistics or packet data will be retrieved Type bin to enter binary transfer mode Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the upgrade provided this function is supported by your equipment Type cd data to change to the data directory If retrieving Then SLV statistics Perform a get of the uhbcfull dat file File Transfer Complete Transfer was successful m File Transfer Failed Transfer was not successful Try again or end the session LMI packet capture data 1 Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility Main Menu gt Control gt LMI Packet Capture Utilit
88. B gt Procedure To limit Telnet or FTP access when the session is on the TS Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Disable Telnet Session and or FTP Session as appropriate 3 Return to the Management and Communication menu and select Node IP 4 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable access via a TS Management Link TS Management Link to None Assign an access level to the TS Management Link TS Management Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the session e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 telnet access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 5 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support or Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about these configuration options 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 4 7 Security and Logins Controlling SNMP Access The FrameSaver unit supports SNMP Version 1 which provides limited security through the use of community names There are three methods for limiting SNM
89. D 2 Interval Type Default Default Tx Total Errors D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs Ue inns OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 Rx Overruns D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxOverruns Ip ins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 28 1 Tx Underruns D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 15 mins Tag devFrExtLinkTx Underruns OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 29 1 Rx Non octet Aligns D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRx 13mins NonOctet OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx CRC Errors D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr 1S mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Total LMI Errors D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 15 mins in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained B 18 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area These alarms apply to all DLCls on the network interface and can be created during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created They are put into the Paradyne alarm area Table B 11 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area Rising Falling
90. DLCI has a high Health Index rating but low volume significant differences between a DLCI s average and peak Health Index rating March 2000 9 7 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Elements Summary Report Compares DLCI traffic with volume and the baseline bandwidth utilization and errors Use this report for DLCI detail information and comparison to identify DLCls with above or below average volume so they can be investigated when there are any significant changes Supplemental Report Shows DLCI availability and latency The information shown in this report is also on other Health reports However these charts show more than ten DLCls at a time so you have a broader view of the service provided by the network Service Level Reports Provide summary information for a group list for a longer reporting period than other reports Executive Service Level Report Provides service level performance for an enterprise on a single page Use this report to assess whether IT service levels are meeting availability and service goals IT Manager Service Level Report Provides service level information for various groups Using this report you can compare service level performance of various groups The report summarizes service levels for a group of DLCls along with details on individual DLCls within that group Customer Service Level Report Provides service level information for cust
91. Data Terminal Ready Shows the current state of the DTR control lead This indicator should always be on CTS Clear to Send Shows the current state of the CTS control lead This indicator should always be on 5 6 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Device Messages 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance These messages appear in the messages area at the bottom of the screens All device messages are listed in alphabetical order Table 5 5 Device Messages 1 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Access level is n User s access level is 2 No action needed Read only or 3 user is not authorized to change configurations Already Active Test selected is already Allow test to continue running Select another test Stop the test Blank Entries Removed New had been selected from the Administer Logins screen no entry was made then Save was selected No action needed Reenter the Login ID Password and Access Level Cannot delete Trap Manager Delete was selected from the Management PVCs Options screen but the PVC had been defined as a trap destination No action needed or configure another path for traps and try again Command Complete Configuration has been saved or all tests have been aborted No action needed Connection Refused Seen at an FTP terminal Two menu driven user interface sessions are already in use when a Te
92. Delay Time Min configuration option Disable Does not retry an incomplete call Dial Out Delay Time Min Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 5 Specifies the amount of time between call retries when an SNMP trap message is sent the wait between call attempts see Call Reiry 1 10 Sets the number of minutes for the delay between call retry attempts inclusive Alternate Dial Out Directory Possible Settings None 1 5 Default Setting None Specifies whether an incomplete call busy or no answer etc resulting from an attempt to send an SNMP trap message is retried using an alternate telephone number Up to 5 alternate call directories can be set up but only one at a time can be used When Call Retry is enabled the alarm directory s telephone number is called first If the call cannot be completed after one additional try then the specified alternate directory s telephone number is called None Does not dial out using one of the alternate directory telephone numbers 1 5 Specifies the call directory containing the telephone number to call if a call cannot be completed using the telephone number in the alarm directory Directory Number A in the Control menu s Modem Call Directories March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Configuring the Communication Port 9124 A2 LB20 00 Select Communication Port from the Management and Communication menu to display
93. ESS T E A E neeageeeneteehe IET nie TTT 6 19 PVG LOOPOACK irei sinemi rei Ere E Ere EEE 6 20 Send PalGtils i0s0cceee saaa a Seamed ERER 6 20 Monitor PateMiiaaninici inisinia r 6 21 CONMGCIVIY uetan a a 6 21 Physical TOSS s cieisiccarsasiasccsrntiardtansatee tandi tnaa ba a E E ORN 6 22 Emo LoopHaACK siunaan ea i a i 6 23 godec elke es o ME E EE A E AA A T T 6 24 Repeater Loopback cisse rinsnieeeiiiradiireiikrrkeki tii bamees 6 25 DTE LOOPHAEK s 0222cccacvisterenaceantanneaeame ERE 6 26 Send Line LoophaCk rreiciriceaniseenicenri dhet e irinin 6 27 Data Channel Loopbacks on a Frame Relay Link 6 28 Send Remote Line Loopback v0 00 cc cecac sinisi dana daeniwdaunace 6 29 Send and Monitor Pattern Tests 0 00 cc eeeee eee eee 6 30 P PNG TEST 2ccn0cbi erect ect sot a Merionnaieeereraminame ds 6 31 BS Lamp lest iii cicteirt dete aiekidnaererenssbarbcaiedesaese geese 6 32 7 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices iv m OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices 000 000s 7 1 m Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System 0 00 c cece eee eee 7 2 Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support 00 ccc eee eee eee 7 2 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Contents 8 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices m Before Getting Started 0 nnana 8 2 Configuring NetScout Manager Plus 0 0ce cece eee aee 8 3 Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus INGER ets
94. Exceeding CIR 1 min configured Tag devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 D in the MIB D DLCI number 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link B 20 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 12 Static DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area 2 of 2 Tag frCircuitSentOctets OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1LD Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Tx CIR Utilization D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs None Must be 0 RFC 2115 1 min configured in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained Table B 13 Dynamic DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Rx DLCI Link D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs Rising 70 of link 65 of link Utilization RFC 2115
95. Failure m linkUp and linkDown m enterprise Specific RMON Specific These traps are listed in alphabetical order within each table March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Trap warmStart This trap indicates that the FrameSaver unit has been reset and has stabilized Table B 3 warmStart Trap Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause warmStart FrameSaver unit has just Reset command sent reinitialized and stabilized f Power disruption itself String Variable Binding Unit reset devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib Trap authenticationFailure This trap indicates that access to the FrameSaver unit was unsuccessful due to lack of authentication Table B 4 authenticationFailure Trap Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause authenticationFailure Access to the FrameSaver SNMP protocol message not unit was attempted and properly authenticated failed Three unsuccessful attempts were made to enter a correct login user ID password combination IP Address security is enabled and a message was received from the SNMP Manager whose address was not on the lost of approved managers String Unauthorized access attempted Variable Binding devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 B 7 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps linkUp and linkDown B
96. Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management between FrameSaver units and attached equipment None Does not use a routing protocol Proprietary Uses a proprietary variant of RIP version 1 to communicate routing information between FrameSaver units A FrameSaver unit must be on the other end of the link This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on multiplexed DLCls see Table 3 9 DLC Record Options Standard_out The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing information only about other FrameSaver SLV units in the network This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on standard DLCls NOTE The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the FrameSaver unit for the management interface e g Cisco config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 ctl z WR See Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 3 53 Configuration Configuring General SNMP Management Select General SNMP Management to add change or delete the information needed to allow the FrameSaver unit to be managed as an SNMP agent by the NMS supporting the SNMP protocols see Table 3 13 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management Table 3 13 General SNMP Management Options SNMP Management Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Dete
97. LCI Utilization SLVrxDLCIUtil Tx CIR Utilization SLVTxCIRUtil Frames Sent Above CIR SLVFramesTxAbvCIR Tx DLCI Utilization SLVTxDLCIUtil Average Latency AverageLatency Frames Received SLVFramesRec Current Latency CurrentLatency These alarms and current values can be found in NSHOME usr slvtemplate fct which is used as a starting point for loading new alarms This file can be copied and edited so the alarm threshold values match service level agreement values The copied fct file can then be used to replicate alarm threshold values for all DLCls on the unit using the eztrap utility All fct files must be in NSHOME usr To configure alarms manually see Adding SLV Alarms Manually NOTE Perl must be installed in your system to use the eztrap utility in the procedure below If you have an NT system please install Perl before proceeding B gt Procedure 1 Open a terminal window and go to NSHOME usr 2 Type eztrap i filename fct o agentname fct agentname and press Enter to run the eztrap utility to create alarm threshold values across all DLCls for the copied fct file The message eztrap done appears when the fct file is transferred 3 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window 4 Edit any alarm values that need to be changed 5 Select the Ins
98. LVs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 6 1 D Congested Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciStsCongestedSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D DLCI Inactive Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciStsInactiveSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Average Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 B 27 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 Alarm OID Cross Reference 2 of 2 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 7 1 D Current Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyLatest 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 2 1 N Frame Size Upper Limits MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 3 1 N Frame Size Count 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzCount 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 1 Rx Short Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 Rx Long Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 11 1 LMI Sequence Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkSeqErr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 14 1 Tx Discards MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTxDiscards 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1
99. Lucent Technologies FrameSaver SLV 9124 User s Guide 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 Lucent Technologies FrameSaver SLV 9124 User s Guide 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 Copyright 2000 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved Reprinted under license agreement with Paradyne Corporation Printed in U S A Trademarks ACCULINK COMSPHERE FrameSaver Hotwire and NextEDGE are registered trademarks of Paradyne Corporation and MVL OpenLane Performance Wizard and TruePut are trademarks of Paradyne Corporation and are used by Lucent Technologies Inc pursuant to a license agreement granted by Paradyne Corporation All other products and services mentioned are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners Patent Notification FrameSaver products are protected by U S Patents 5 550 700 and 5 654 966 Other patents are pending A March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Contents About This Guide m Purpose and Intended Audience 0 ese eee e ee eee eee eee vii E Document OfGaniZalON ss ccducardcediadediarediddeadadadiadsdeadus vii m Product Related Documents 00c cece cence eee eee ix Comentons Usog sauidncsddedendidiudd Dna Ann Medeotiaaoe x 1 About the FrameSaver SLV 9124 m SLM Overview 0 0 0 0 1 1 m FrameSaver SLV 9124 Features 0 0 00 ccc cee eee 1 2 2 User Interface and Basic Operation w LogIn OM 5 x ctisr
100. M port A parity bit is added to the data to make the 1 bits of each character add up to either an odd or even number Each character of transmitted data is approved as error free if the 1 bits add up to an odd or even number as specified by this configuration option None Provides no parity Even Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always even Odd Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always odd March 2000 3 63 Configuration 3 64 Table 3 17 Communication Port Options 2 of 4 Stop Bits Possible Settings 1 2 Default Setting 1 Determines the number of stop bits used for the COM port 1 Provides one stop bit 2 Provides two stop bits Ignore Control Leads Possible Settings Disable DTR Default Setting Disable Specifies whether DTR is used Disable Treats control leads as standard operation DTR Ignores DTR This may be necessary when connecting to some PAD devices Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user ID and password referred to as the login is required in order to log on to the asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Requires a login to access the menu driven user interface Disable Does not requires a login
101. NMS n IP Address configuration option for each trap manager to receive trap messages 1 6 Specifies the number of trap managers inclusive NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address that identifies the SNMP manager s to receive SNMP traps Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the IP address for the trap manager Clear Fills the NMS IP address with zeros March 2000 3 59 Configuration Table 3 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 2 of 4 Initial Route Destination Possible Settings AutoRoute COM PVCname Default Setting AutoRoute Specifies the initial route used to reach the specified Trap Manager When proprietary RIP is active only one unit in the network needs to specify an interface or management link as the initial destination All other units can use the default setting Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option AutoRoute Uses proprietary RIP from other FrameSaver devices to learn the route for sending traps to the specified Trap Manager or the Default IP Destination when no route is available in the routing table see Table 3 11 No
102. NetScout Server Administrator Guide 2930 788 NetScout Manager Plus Set Up amp Installation Guide Concord Communications Documentation 09 10010 005 Network Health User Guide 09 10020 005 Network Health Installation Guide 09 10050 002 Network Health Traffic Accountant Reports Guide 09 10070 001 Network Health Reports Guide Contact your sales or service representative to order product documentation March 2000 ix About This Guide Conventions Used Convention Used Italic Menu selection sequence Path Brackets Text highlighted in red When Used To indicate variable information e g DLCI nnnn To provide an abbreviated method for indicating the selections to be made from a menu or selections from within a menu before performing a procedural step For example Main Menu gt Status gt System and Test Status indicates that you should select Status from the Main Menu then select System and Test Status from the Status menu To provide a checkpoint that coincides with the menu path shown at the top of the screen Always shown within parentheses so you can verify that you are referencing the correct table e g Path main config alarm To indicate multiple selection choices when multiple options can be displayed e g Clear Network Port 1 Statistics To indicate a hyperlink to additional information when viewing this manual online Click on the highlighted text March 2000
103. Out LBO ANSI PRM Bit stuffing 8 position modular unkeyed USOC RJ48C jack Up to 1 536 Mbps Fractional T1 service frame relay service RJ48C CA81A using adapter cable D4 ESF AMI B8ZS 0 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5 dB Selectable AT amp T TR 62411 DSX 1 Interface if applicable Physical interface Framing format Coding format DTE line equalization 8 position modular connector with optional 8 position modular to DB15 adapter D Sub 15 socket D4 ESF AMI B8ZS 5 selectable ranges from 0 to 655 feet 0 196 5 meters Send AIS Selectable Data Port 34 position V 35 connector Standard V 35 ITU ISO 2593 Data rates Variations for T1 rates automatically set to the network rate March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Equipment List Equipment See page E 2 for cables you can order Model Feature Description Number FrameSaver SLV Units FrameSaver SLV 9124 T1 Remote Site with 64 PVCs 9124 A2 201 Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 Vac Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver SLV 9124 T1 Japanese Central Site with 120 PVCs 9124C Includes 1 Slot Housing 100 240 Vac Power Supply Network 9124 A2 404 002 Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference User Manual FrameSaver SLV 9124 User s Guide Paper Manual 9124 A2 GB20 Power Supplies 100 240 Vac for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F 1 040 120 Vac for 1 Sl
104. P access Disabling SNMP access Assigning SNMP community names and the access type Assigning IP addresses of those NMSs that can access the unit Disabling SNMP Access 4 8 When the SNMP access is disabled the FrameSaver unit will not respond to SNMP messages B gt Procedure To disable SNMP access 1 Select the General SNMP Management options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management 2 Disable the SNMP Management option 3 Save your change See Configuring SNMP Management in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about General SNMP Management configuration options March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Security and Logins Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP protocol and can be managed by an SNMP manager SNMP manager access can be limited by Assigning the SNMP community names that are allowed to access the FrameSaver unit s Management Information Base MIB Specifying the type of access allowed for each SNMP community name Whenever an SNMP manager attempts to access an object in the MIB the community name must be supplied B gt Procedure To assign SNMP community names and access types 1 Select the General SNMP Management options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management 2 Set the following configuration options as appropri
105. PVC Name m Virtual circuit is a management link that terminates in the unit where Name is the link name DLCI 16 to 1007 For standard DLCls Identifies an individual link connection embedded within a DLCI 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 5 21 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 10 PVC Connection Status 2 of 2 Field Status What It Indicates EDLCI 0 to 62 For multiplexed DLCls only Identifies an individual link connection embedded within a DLCI Status Identifies whether the physical interfaces LMls and DLCls are all enabled and active for this PVC connection Active The PVC is currently active Inactive The PVC is inactive because Alarm conditions and network and SLV communication status indicate that data cannot be successfully passed The unit has disabled the interface or frame relay link due to internal operating conventions Activation of an alternate virtual circuit is not warranted that is no alarm condition on the primary destination link has been detected Disabled The PVC cannot be activated and is essentially disabled as a result of how the unit was configured Possible causes The physical interface at one or both ends of the PVC is are disabled The frame relay link on one or both ends of the PVC is are disabled Invalid Some portion of the PVC connection is not fully configured 1 For the circuit to be active bo
106. Port Options B gt Procedure To download software 1 2 3 9124 A2 LB20 00 Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading Type bin to enter binary transfer mode Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the upgrade provided this function is supported by your equipment Type cd system to change to the system directory Perform a put of Rxxxxxx ocd xxxxxx being the software release number to the nam ocd file to start the upgrade If the message displayed is Then nam ocd File Transfer Complete The download was successful The file is loaded into system memory nam ocd File Transfer Failed The file is not valid for this FrameSaver unit Invalid file A different Rxxxxxx ocd file will need to be downloaded Repeat the step or end the FTP session NOTE During the download a series of hash marks appear When the hash marks stop appearing there is a pause of about 30 seconds before the nam ocd File Transfer Complete message appears Please be patient Do not exit from FTP at this time See Changing Software to activate the newly downloaded software March 2000 5 39 Operation and Maintenance Determining Whether a Download Is Completed To see whether a download has completed check the Identity screen Main Menu gt Status gt Identity Check Alternate Software Rev under the NAM Identity column m f a software revision num
107. Possible Cause Solutions Cannot access the unit or the menu driven user interface Login or password is incorrect COM port is misconfigured or the unit is otherwise configured so it prevents access Reset the unit see Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit Contact your service representative Failure XXXXXXXX appears at the top of the System and Test Status screen at Self Test Results The unit has detected an internal software failure Record the 8 digit code from the System and Test Status screen Reset the unit and try again Contact your service representative and provide the 8 digit failure code An LED appears dysfunctional LED is burned out Run the Lamp Test If the LED in question does not flash with the other LEDs then contact your service representative Not receiving data Network cable loose or broken Reconnect or repair the cable Call the network service provider Receiving data errors on a multiplexed DLCI but frame relay is okay Frame Relay Discovery is being used for automatic DLCI and PVC configuration The equipment at the other end is not frame relay RFC 1490 compliant Change the DLCI Type for each network DLCI from Multiplexed to Standard turning off multiplexing March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Frame Relay PVC Problems Table 6 3 Frame Relay PVC Problems Troubleshooting Sym
108. Press Enter to stop the test Start reappears and the status of the test changes back to Inactive 7 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 6 17 Troubleshooting Aborting All Tests 6 18 Use the Abort All Tests selection from the Test menu to abort all tests running on all interfaces with exception to DTE initiated loopbacks To abort individual tests that are active see Starting and Stopping a Test p gt Procedure To abort all tests on all interfaces 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test 2 Select Abort All Tests and press Enter Command Complete appears when all tests on all interfaces have been stopped NOTE Abort All Tests does not interrupt DTE initiated loopbacks March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 PVC Tests 9124 A2 LB20 00 Troubleshooting PVC tests can be run on a requested DLCI for a selected interface m When PVC tests are on a multiplexed DLCI between FrameSaver devices they are nondisruptive to data so user data can continue to be sent during a test m If the device at one end of the circuit is not a FrameSaver device PVC tests are on a standard DLCI and are disruptive to data Also the Connectivity test would not appear Loopback and send monitor pattern tests are available for each interface on the selected DLCI FrameSaver devices should be at each end of the circuit If a PVC Loopback is started at o
109. STATUS D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D05 1 01r D05 1 02r D05 1 03r S1P01 S1P01 S1P01 S1P01 S1P01 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 D17 D118 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Slot 1 T1 FR NAM Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu Refresh MainMenu Exit March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance The following information is available for DSX 1 interface time slots DO1 D24 The Cross Connect Status Field bottom Indicates the blank The time slot is unassigned Nett tt Network interface 1 time slot tt is assigned to DSX 1 time slot 01 to 24 using Clear Channel Nett ttr Network interface 1 time slot tt is assigned to DSX 1 time slot 01 to 24 using Robbed Bit Signaling r Performance Statistics Use the Performance Statistics menu to display statistical information for a selected interface Statistical information is useful when trying to determine the severity and frequency or duration of a condition Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Physical and link layer statistics Layers 1 and 2 are collected on the port The following menu shows the performance statistics that can be selected Performance Statistics Menu main status performance 9124 II Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 2
110. Scout Manager Plus main window the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected March 2000 8 13 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices B gt Procedure 1 Open a terminal window and go to NSHOME usr 2 Copy an example or interface specific file to a new file that contains the user history table number 3 Open the new file using a text editor The variables in the file are listed with their OIDs Object IDs The frame relay interface number 101015001 must replace IFN and the DLC number to be monitored must replace DLCI Example frCircuitSentFrames Change 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 IFN DLCI to 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 101015001 301 The only valid interface number for a FrameSaver 9124 model is 101015001 4 Edit the new file as needed Refer to Creating UDH Files and Using Custom History in the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information See Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Default for OID information for an interface 8 14 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Installing the User Defined History Files 9124 A2 LB20 00 Once the user defined history files have been created the files need to be installed History files are installed from the command line prompt in NetScout Manager Plus Should the FrameSaver unit be reset these files will need to be reinstalled The command used to install a new user hist
111. Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Slot 1 Tl FR NAM Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 5 23 Operation and Maintenance The following information is available for network interface time slots NO1 N24 The Cross Connect Status Field bottom Indicates Unassgn The time slot is unassigned FrameRly1 The time slot is assigned to the network frame relay link Ds p tt The DSX 1 time slot tt is assigned to the network interface time slot 01 to 24 Ds p ttr The DSX 1 time slot tt is assigned to the network interface time slot 01 to 24 using Robbed Bit Signaling r Displaying DSX 1 Time Slot Assignments Use the DSX 1 Timeslot Assignment Status screen to display all of the DSO assignments for each DSO on the DSX 1 interface Main Menu gt Status gt Timeslot Assignment Status gt DSX 1 The DSX 1 Timeslot Assignment Status screen displays 24 two field entries in three rows Together each two field entry defines the assignment for one DSX 1 interface time slot The top field represents the time slot of the DSX 1 Interface The bottom field represents the cross connect status of the associated top field DSX 1 time slot DSX 1 Timeslot Assignment Status Screen Example main status timeslot dsx_display Device Name Node A 9124 II 5 26 1999 23 32 DSX 1 TIMESLOT ASSIGNMENT
112. a COM port connected terminal the session is ended For a modem port connected terminal the session is ended and the modem is disconnected For a Telnet connection the session is closed and if no other Telnet or FTP session is occurring over the connection the modem is disconnected If ending a session from the Configuration branch see Saving Configuration Options in Chapter 3 Configuration 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 2 3 User Interface and Basic Operation Main Menu Entry to all of the FrameSaver unit s tasks begins at the Main Menu which has five menus or branches The Access Level at the top of the screen only appears when security has been set up main Access Level 1 9124 II Device Name Node A 04 26 1999 23 32 Slot 1 Type T1 FR NAM MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Ctrl a to access these functions Select To Status View diagnostic tests interfaces PVC connections and statistics You can also display LEDs and FrameSaver unit identity information Test Select and cancel test for the FrameSaver unit s interfaces Configuration Display and edit the configuration options Auto Configuration Configure basic access unit setup automatically based upon a selected application You can also automatically populate network and data port DLCI configuration options with numeric settings Control Control the menu driven user interface for ca
113. a Channel Loopback on the frame relay link on this network interface B gt Procedure To start and stop a Remote Line Loopback 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests Select the desired Network interface shown in the screen title Select the code Up or Down in the Send Line Loopback field Up Puts a remote device in loopback Down Takes the remote device out of loopback Highlight Send and press Enter to start the test The code is sent for 10 seconds View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column March 2000 6 29 Troubleshooting Send and Monitor Pattern Tests The pattern tests enable a FrameSaver unit to either send or monitor a known bit pattern These tests generate industry standard bit patterns that can be used to determine whether information is being correctly transmitted across a circuit The following test patterns are available QRSS 511 All zeros 2047 All ones 2E15 1 215 1 1 in 8 2E20 1 220 1 3 in 24 User defined 2 byte test pattern a0a0 63 A Send Pattern test cannot be started when the following tests are running Any Loopback on the same interface m Send FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on the synchronous data port B gt Procedure To send and monitor a Pattern Test 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test gt Network Phy
114. able so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit 2 Verify that the central site NMS s router has the FrameSaver unit s IP address in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit 3 Verify that the central site NMS has been configured as an SNMP Trap Manager if the router is to route data so a route has been configured within the FrameSaver unit Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps Or for a local DLCI between the central site FrameSaver unit and its router verify that a Default IP Destination route has been configured Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Node IP Default IP Destination Configure both SNMP Traps and a Default IP Destination when PVC Multiplexing is used as when using the Auto Configuration feature 4 Select the IP Ping test Main Menu gt Test gt IP Ping 5 Enter the IP Address of the central site NMS then select Start 6 Verify the results of the IP Ping test While the test is running In Progress is displayed in the Status field When the test is finished Alive Latency nn ms should appear as the Status nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds If any other message is displayed additional testing will be required Lamp Test The FrameSaver unit supports a Lamp Test to verify that all LEDs are lighting and functioning properly All LEDs flash or blink on and
115. ace or the OpenLane system using its easy to use Diagnostic Troubleshooting feature These tests include V 54 or FT1 ANSI data channel loopback support so the frame relay network service provider can perform a physical loopback from its own switch without having to contact the leased line provider for loopback activation Dedicated Troubleshooting PVC Provides a troubleshooting management link that helps service providers isolate problems within their network This feature can be configured LMI Packet Capture Provides a way to upload data that has been captured in a trace file so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for analysis or viewed via the menu driven user interface The 12 most recent LMI messages can be displayed from the menu driven user interface Maximum Number of PVCs and Management PVCs Supported Central Site Remote Site FrameSaver FrameSaver Feature SLV 9124 SLV 9124 Through Connections PVCs 120 64 Dedicated Management PVCs 2 2 Model for Japan only Router Independence Unique diagnostics performance monitoring PVC based in band network management and SNMP connectivity is not dependent upon external routers cables or LAN adapters Inverse ARP and Standard RIP Support Provides Inverse ARP Address Resolution Protocol support so the frame relay router at one end of a management PVC can acquire the IP address of a FrameSaver unit at the other
116. ad only NOTES Ifa DLCI number is not entered the DLCI record is not created The DLCI number entered must be unique for the interface Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any active frame relay tests 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number inclusive DLCI Type Possible Settings Standard Multiplexed Default Setting For user data port DLCIs Standard For network interface DLCIs Multiplexed Specifies whether the DLCI is standard or multiplexed This field is read only when the selected DLCI is used in a PVC or Management link connection and the DLCI Type is Standard Display Conditions This option does not appear for a user data port and it cannot be changed if the DLCI is specified as the TS Management Link Standard Supports standard DLCls as specified by the Frame Relay Standards Use this setting when a non FrameSaver unit is at the other end For user data port DLCls this is the only selection available Multiplexed Enables multiplexing of multiple connections into a single DLCI Allows a single PVC through the frame relay network to carry multiple DLCls as long as these connections are between the same two endpoints proprietary Do not select Multiplexed unless there are FrameSaver units at both ends of the connection March 2000 3 43 Configuration Table 3 9 DLCI Record Options 2 of 3 CIR bps Possible Settings
117. al Modem COM Port Options 2 of 2 Alternate IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the Alternate IP Address for the COM port when the alternate phone directory is used If this configuration option is not configured i e it is zero the COM port s primary IP Address is used when the alternate telephone directory is used Display Conditions This option does not appear if External Modem Commanas is set to AT Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 3 17 Communication Port Options 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the COM port s Alternate IP Address which you can view or edit The first byte i e nnn 255 255 255 can be any number from 001 through 223 excluding 127 Remaining bytes i e 223 nnn nnn nnn can be any number from 000 through 255 Leading zeros are required Clear Clears the Alternate IP Address for the COM port and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 Alternate Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the Alternate Subnet Mask for the COM port when the alternate phone directory is used Display Conditions This option does not appear if External Modem Commands is set to AT Only in effect when the COM port is configu
118. all time slots on the network interface 2 Enable or disable Time Slot Discovery When enabled the unit examines all time slots not cross connected to other ports to determine which time slots are being used by the network for frame relay traffic These time slots are set to FrameRly1 This is the factory default When disabled time slot assignments must be manually configured 3 If Time Slot Discovery is disabled assign network time slots for use by frame relay service link 1 by typing FrameRly1 in the selected Network field 4 Repeat Step 3 until all desired time slots are assigned 5 Save the configuration Assigning DSX 1 Time Slots to the Network Interface DSX 1 time slots are assigned by channel allocation where you specify individual time slots The DSX 1 interface must be enabled to assign DSX 1 time slots to the network interface see Table 3 6 DSX 1 Physical Interface Options Value Meaning Nit It represents time slot tt of the selected network interface Assigned The time slot is already assigned to something other than a DSX 1 time slot so it is unavailable Assigned time slots cannot be modified from this screen Available The time slot is currently unassigned Ds p tt Time slot tt of DSX 1 interface p in slot s is assigned to the network interface time slot identified right above it Ntt 3 34 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration DSX 1 to Network Time Slo
119. an error is reported Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies the maximum number of errors 3 18 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 2 of 2 LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 1 Configures the LMI defined N3 parameter which sets the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies how many error free messages it will take to clear the error event LMI Status Enquiry N1 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 255 Default Setting 6 Configures the LMI defined N1 parameter which sets the number of status enquiry polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated Applies to the user side of a UNI only 1 255 Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated before a full status enquiry is initiated LMI Heartbeat T1 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 10 Configures the LMI defined T1 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI Applies to the user side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of s
120. art interface ABCD 1111 FXOg busy FXSI idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXS Loop Start interface ABCD 0101 FXOI idle FXSI busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXS Loop Start interface ABCD 1111 FXOl busy FXOD idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXODN interface ABCD 0000 FXSD idle FXOD busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXODN interface ABCD 1111 FXSD busy FXSD idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXSDN interface ABCD 0000 FXOD idle 3 38 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Table 3 7 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values 3 of 3 Configuration Network Side Meaning DSX 1 Side FXSD busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXSDN interface ABCD 1111 FXOD busy PLAR idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a PLAR D3 interface ABCD 0000 PLAR idle PLAR3busy T
121. ate To Set the configuration option Assign SNMP community names Community Name 1 and Community Name 2 to a community name text up to 255 characters in length Assign the type of access allowed Name 1 Access and Name 2 Access to Read for the SNMP community names or Read Write 3 Save your changes See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about General SNMP Management configuration options 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 4 9 Security and Logins Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses An additional level of security is provided by Limiting the IP addresses of NMSs that can access the FrameSaver unit Performing validation checks on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the FrameSaver unit Specifying the access allowed for the authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed The SNMP NMS Security Options screen provides the configuration options that determine whether security checking is performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to communicate with the unit Make sure that SNMP Management is set to Enable Menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management SNMP Management Enable See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about SNMP management configuration options B
122. ate or time was entered on the System Information screen The date does not exist e g February 30th Reenter the date in the month day 4 digit year format and or time in the hour minutes seconds format Invalid time must be hh mm ss A non valid system time was entered on the System Information screen Reenter the time in the hour minutes seconds format Invalid Already Active A test was already in progress when it was selected No action needed Invalid Password Login is required and an incorrect password was entered access is denied Try again Contact your system administrator to verify your password Invalid Test Combination A conflicting loopback or pattern test was in progress when Start was selected to start another test or was active on the same or another interface when Start was selected Wait until other test ends and message clears Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path main test Stop the test from the same screen the test was started from Limit of six Login IDs reached An attempt to enter a new login ID was made and the limit of six login password combinations has been reached Delete another login password combination Reenter the new login ID Limit of Mgmt PVCs reached New was selected from the PVC Connection Table and the maximum number of management PVCs has already been created Do not c
123. ater than 1007 The device on the far end of the circuit may have been configured incorrectly or the DLCls configured for the FrameSaver unit may not match the DLCls supplied by the service provider Unknown DLCI The number of frames received over the interface that were addressed to unknown DLCls The DLCI may not have been configured or it has been configured to be Inactive Indicates that the FrameSaver units or devices at both or either end of the circuit have been configured incorrectly Unknown Error The number of frames received over the interface that do not fall into one of the other statistic categories Indicates that the error is not one that the unit can recognize Frame Relay LMI LMI Protocol The LMI protocol configured for the frame relay link Normal condition Status Msg Received The number of LMI status messages received over the interface Normal condition Total LMI Errors The number of LMI errors Reliability errors protocol errors unknown report types unknown information elements and sequence errors are included in this total Network problems Number of Inactives The number of times the LMI has declared the frame relay link Inactive Network problems 5 32 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 13 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 3 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay HDLC Errors Rx Total Error
124. attached to the COM port see Table 3 18 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt External Modem Com Port NOTE A standard EIA 232 crossover cable is required when connecting an external modem to the FrameSaver units COM port See Standard EIA 232 D Crossover Cable in Appendix C Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments for cable pin assignments Table 3 18 External Modem COM Port Options 1 of 2 External Modem Commands Possible Settings Disable AT Default Setting Disable Specifies the type of commands to be sent over the COM port Disable Commands will not be sent over the COM port AT Standard Attention AT Commands are sent over the COM port to control the external device All AT command strings will end with a carriage return hex 0x0D anda line feed hex 0x0A CAUTION Do not use this setting if you have an asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port Dial In Access Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Controls whether external devices can dial in to the FrameSaver unit through the COM port based on the Port Use option setting Display Conditions This option does not appear if External Modem Commands is disabled Enable Answers incoming calls and establishes connection to the remote terminal or IP network Disable Does not answer incoming calls March 2000 3 67 Configuration Table 3 18 Extern
125. ber appears the file transfer is complete lf In Progress appears the file is still being transferred m f Invalid appears no download has occurred or the download was not successful Changing Software Once a software upgrade is downloaded it needs to be activated When activated the unit resets then executes the downloaded software With this feature you control when the upgrade software is implemented B gt Procedure To switch to the new software 1 Go to the Control menu and select Select Software Release Main Menu Control gt Select Software Release The currently loaded software version and the new release that was just transferred are shown If the download failed Invalid appears in the Alternate Release field instead of the new release number Repeat the procedure in Upgrading System Software if this occurs 2 Select Switch amp Reset 3 Enter Yes to the Are you sure prompt The unit resets and begins installing the newly transferred software 4 Verify that the new software release was successfully installed as the Current Software Revision Main Menu gt Status gt Identity NOTE If someone opens a Telnet session and accesses the unit s Identity screen while the unit is downloading software the In Progress message appears in the Alternate Software Revision field See Displaying System Information to see what is included on the unit s Identity screen 5 40 March 2000 9124
126. ble B 14 History OID Cross Reference 1 of 4 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 5 1 Link Speed MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag ifSpeed 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 1 All DLCI LMI Rx Octets MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag iflnOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 16 1 All DLCI LMI Tx Octets MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag ifOutOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 10 32 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx FECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx BECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Tx Frames MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx Octets MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Rx Frames MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Rx Octets MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 12 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 12 2 1 2 P Protocol Octets MIB RMON II RFC 2021 for 11 l for 11 protoco s Tag protocolDistStatsOctets 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 B 23 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 History
127. capture buffer or trace log is full the oldest packets are overwritten To view the most recently captured packets using the menu driven user interface LMI Packet Capture Utility gt Display LMI Trace Log LMI Trace Log Example main control lmi_capture display_log 9124 II Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 LMI TRACE LOG Page 1 of 3 Packets Transmitted to Net1 FR Packets Received from Net1 FR1 LMI Record 1 at 0 s Status Enquiry Message 13 bytes LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023 Sequence Number Exchange Send Seq 181 Rev Seq 177 LMI Record 2 at 0 s Status Enquiry Message 13 bytes LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023 Sequence Number Exchange Send Seq 181 Rev Seq 177 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh PgUp PgDn Select Refresh to update the screen with the twelve most recently collected LMI messages The following information is provided m The internal LMI record number assigned to the packet 1 8000 and the amount of time the utility was running when the packet was captured The maximum amount of time displayed is 4 294 967 seconds s which is reset to 1 second when this amount of time is exceeded m The type of message either Status or Status Enquiry from the captured packet and the number of bytes in the packet The LMI Type identified in the Protocol Discriminator portion of the captured packet and the DLCI number for the packet The type o
128. ccess TST LED TXD control lead 5 6 Type Access U UNI 1 2 3 18 3 19 3 41 3 42 upgrading system software upload download capability uploading data 5 41 user history adding files 8 13 installing files 8 15 monitoring DLCI 8 16 statistics gathering user interface cannot be accessed A V 35 connector crossover cable straight through cable V 54 Loopback V 54 Loopback Value Out of Range message variable bindings B 9 B 14 VCl viewing packet capture results virtual path or channel identifier vPI 1 4 W warmStart events General Traps trap Web site access to documentation glossary Y Yellow Alarm B 9 Alarm Signal at DSX 1 or Network 5 17 6 12 COM port set up external modem for trap dial out communication port options external modem on Com port options resetting restoring access Telnet session user defined history IN 10 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00
129. ce 2000 e 2 eee 3 40 Manually Configuring DLCI Records 020 cece cece eee 3 43 Configuring PVO Gonnections o c iccercreceinasoneeeriesereeeecsse 3 46 Setting Up Management and Communication Options 3 48 Configuring Node IP Information 000 eee e eee eens 3 48 Configuring Management PVCs 002 00 cece eee eee 3 51 Configuring General SNMP Management 00 3 54 Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support 3 55 Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options 3 58 Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out 3 59 Configuring the Communication Port s cesisissrrivririririsnrosi 3 63 Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem 3 67 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Contents 4 Security and Logins Liming ACCESS 2 cccstete x bi kews emit aea oebebesbeiead ss 4 2 Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access 00000 ce eee 4 2 Controlling External COM Port Device Access 0005 4 4 Controlling Telnet or FTP AcceSS 0000 cee c ence eee eae 4 4 Limiting Telnet ACCESS 2cisccinrerandorapaeeeraerieagre phen at 4 5 Limiting FTP ACCESS cocci iiccticimitiedidienddinadbeds d huire t 4 6 Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link 4 7 Controlling SNMP ACCESS sivccciccdaaddeniuduiotaadbaneaciaed ascend 4 8 Disabling SNMP ACCESS sinc bonded iadnacdoudeceadowendowd
130. cess Level is Level 3 then only level 3 access is allowed for the session Level 1 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed CAUTION Before changing the session access level to Level 2 or 3 make sure that the COM port s Port Access Level is set to Level 1 and that at least one Login ID is set to Level 1 Otherwise access will be lost If this occurs you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the configuration process again A reset is required if the Communication Port s Port Use option is set to Net Link see Table 3 3 General System Options Level 2 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information and run tests only they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information only they cannot change configuration options or run tests Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a Telnet session is disconnected after a specified period of keyboard inactivity Enable Terminates the session after the Disconnect Time expires Disable Does not terminate Telnet session during inactivity
131. changes to the configuration options are complete use the Save function key to save your changes to either the Current Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration areas NOTE When changing settings you must Save for changes to take effect B gt Procedure To save the configuration option changes 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the function key area at the bottom of the screen 2 Type sor S to select the Save function and press Enter The Save Configuration To screen appears NOTE If you try to exit the Configuration menu without saving changes a Save Configuration screen appears requiring a Yes or No response If you select No the Main Menu screen reappears and the changes are not saved If you select Yes the Save Configuration To screen appears 3 Select the configuration option area to which you want to save your changes usually the Current Configuration and press Enter When Save is complete Command Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the screen NOTE There are other methods of changing configurations like SNMP and Auto Configuration Since multiple sessions can be active at the same time the last change made overwrites any previous or current changes being made For instance Saving your configuration changes would cause configuration changes made via another method to be lost If you are making changes and someone else makes changes and saves them your changes would b
132. circuit String testString test stopped on ifString e g Disruptive PVC Loopback test stopped on DLCI 100 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay March 2000 B 13 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps RMON Specific B 14 Two traps are defined to support the Alarm and Events Groups of RMON See RMON Alarm and Event Defaults for the default values that will generate RMON specific traps Table B 8 RMON Specific Traps and Variable Bindings Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause risingAlarm alarmindex RFC 1757 Object being monitored has risen above the set threshold alarmVariable RFC 1757 String i s leT Change in variableName 5 BEC el etype typeString threshold of alarmRisingThreshold by alarmValue RFC 1757 alarmValue n AlarmRisingThreshold alarmRisingThreshold or e g Octets received on alarm Falling Threshold Network T1 frame relay rose RFC 1757 to threshold of 1 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib fallingAlarm alarmindex RFC 1757 Object being monitored has alarmVariable RFC 1757 alarmSampleType RFC 1757 alarmValue RFC 1757 alarmFalling Threshold RFC 1757 fallen below the set threshold String Change in variableName typeString threshold of alarmFallingThreshold by alarmValue AlarmFalling Threshold e g Octets received on Network T1 frame relay fell
133. d configuration files to be downloaded using selected bandwidth without interfering with normal operation Using this option new software and configuration files can be downloaded quickly using the default settings or at a slower rate over an extended period of time by selecting a slower speed Based upon TCP flow control the FTP server in the system throttles bandwidth to match this setting 1 1536 Sets the download line speed from 1 kilobits per second to the maximum management speed March 2000 3 57 Configuration Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options Select SNMP NMS Security from the Management and Communication menu to display add or change SNMP security configuration options for the FrameSaver unit to set up trap managers see Table 3 15 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP NMS Security A table is displayed consisting of the network management systems identified by IP address that are allowed to access the FrameSaver unit by SNMP Table 3 15 SNMP NMS Security Options NMS IP Validation Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether security checks are performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the node Only allows access when the sending manager s IP address is listed on the SNMP NMS Security Options screen Enable Performs security checks Disable Does not perform security checks
134. de LMI packet capture data Imitrace syc is not readable when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is active FrameSaver SLV units provide an additional feature that allows new software to be downloaded in the background using the selected bandwidth and without interfering with normal operation Downloads can be performed quickly using the full line speed or at a slower rate over an extended period of time You initiate an FTP session to a FrameSaver node in the same way as you would initiate an FTP to any other IP addressable device NOTE Loading a configuration with many DLCls from a unit s Customer Configuration 1 or 2 option area into its Current Configuration area may take time Allow a minute or more for the downloaded file to be put into the unit s currently active configuration March 2000 5 37 Operation and Maintenance 5 38 B gt Procedure To initiate an FTP session 1 Start the FTP client program on your host For example on a UNIX host type ftp followed by the FrameSaver unit s IP address If a login and password are required see Creating a Login in Chapter 4 Security and Logins you are prompted to enter them If not press Enter The FTP prompt appears The starting directory is the root directory Use standard FTP commands during the FTP session as well as the following remote FTP commands Command Definition cd directory Change the current directory on the FrameSaver n
135. de IP Options COM Uses the COM port This selection is only available when Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 3 17 Communication Port Options PVCname Uses the defined management linkname the name given the Management PVC This selection only appears when at least one Management PVC is defined for the node General Traps Possible Settings Disable Warm AuthFail Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP trap messages for warmStart and or authenticationFailure events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Disable Does not send trap messages for these events Warm Sends trap messages for warmStart events only AuthFail Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events only Both Sends trap messages for both warmStart and authenticationFailure events Enterprise Specific Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events Disable Does not send trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events Link Traps Possible Settings Disable Up Down Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP linkDown or linkUp traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s A linkDown trap indicates that the unit recognizes a failure in one of the interfaces
136. des complete LAN and WAN traffic analysis and monitoring functions for FrameSaver SLV devices The following features are supported using this application Thresholds for RMON 1 Remote Monitoring Version 1 alarms and events can be configured Performance monitoring can be performed using collected RMON 2 Version 2 data NetScout Manager Plus s Protocol Directory and Distribution functionality allows FrameSaver devices to measure up to eleven network layer protocols and report the amount of traffic generated by each Its IP Top Talkers and Listeners reporting identifies the devices using network bandwidth for traffic and protocol analysis identifying the network s top six users In addition it collects performance statistics from FrameSaver devices Up to 900 samples can be stored in 15 minute buckets with 96 buckets in a 24 hour period for up to five days worth of data Optional standalone NetScout Probes can be used with FrameSaver devices at sites where full 7 layer monitoring an unlimited number of protocols and advanced frame capture and decode capabilities are desired March 2000 1 5 About the FrameSaver SLV 9124 1 6 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 User Interface and Basic Operation This chapter tells you how to access use and navigate the menu driven user interface It includes the following Logging On Main Menu m Screen Work Areas Navigating the Screens Keyboard Keys Function Keys Se
137. dn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 2 1 LMI Unavailable Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkNoLMISecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Total Rx CRC Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 Total Tx Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 Total Rx Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Total LMI Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotLMIErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 2 1 N Port Burst Upper Limits 1 4 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkUtilUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 3 1 N Rx Port Burst Octets 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkUtilRxOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 4 1 N Tx Port Burst Octets 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkUtilTxOctets 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size See Table B 15 on page B 27 for an RMON alarm OID cross reference B 26 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Tra
138. e What It Indicates Time Slot Discovery in Progress Network 1 Time slot discovery is currently taking place to determine the time slots that will be used for frame relay traffic on the network interface This message only appears when the Time Slot Discovery option is enabled Main Menu gt Configuration Time Slot Assignment Frame Relay Network Assignments and an LMI failure is detected on the network interface s frame relay link Yellow at DSX 1 A yellow alarm signal is received on the DSX 1 interface DTE has detected a LOS or OOF condition Yellow at Network 1 A yellow alarm signal is received on the network interface Possible reasons include Network cable problem T1 facility problem Test Status Messages These test messages appear in the right column of the System and Test Status screen You have the option of allowing the test to continue or aborting the test See Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for more information on tests including how to start and stop them Table 5 8 Test Status Messages 1 of 2 Message What It Indicates DCLB Active Net1 FR1 Port 1 A Data Channel V 54 Loopback DCLB is active on the T1 network frame relay link or on the data for the user data port DTE External LB Active Port 1 An external DTE Loopback is running on the user data port DTE Init Ext LB Active Port 1 The DTE has initiated an external DTE Loopback on th
139. e iflndex 65 2 513 OUT VIRTUAL PVC f interface number For the DCE DLCI number DCE DTE calculated value 1 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 B 5 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps B 6 This section describes the FrameSaver unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features All traps have an associated string to help you decipher the meaning of the trap Strings associated with an interface with a substring containing ifString have the following format DLCI diciNumber circuitld of ifName frame relay link linkName dlciNumber is the DLCI number DLCI diciNumber circuitld only appears when a DLCI is associated with the trap circuitld is the name given to the circuit It can be an empty string ora 1 64 byte string within quotes e g Chicago to New York and only appears when a DLCI with circuitID is associated with the trap linkName is the name given to the link Frame relay linkName only appears when a frame relay link has been named and is associated with the trap ifName is the string returned for the SNMP ifName variable Example DLCI 100 Chicago to New York of Network T1 frame relay link Net1 FR1 In this example a DLCI and a frame relay link are associated with the trap The unit supports the following traps warmStart m authentication
140. e 5 12 DLCI Performance Statistics 2 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates With BECN Set The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion notifications BECNs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator Total Rx Frames Total number of data frames and octets 8 bit bytes received Rx Octets for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link Within CIR The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were within the committed information rate Between CIR amp EIR The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate Above EIR The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were above the excess information rate m With DE Set The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set With BECN Set The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion notifications BECNs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator m With FECN Set The number of frames and octets received o
141. e Near Far Near Far Near Far Current 10 37 0 0 0 Line 10 Ory 10235 02 10 20 03 10 05 Line 13 04 09 50 05 09 35 06 09 20 Line 16 07 09 05 0 0 0 te te 0 0 0 ooooooo0o o ooooo0o 00 oooooo0 0 oooooo0oo0o o oooooo0o0 0 Line 18 Worst Interval 24 24 14 14 Near Tot valid 96 00010 00000 Far Tot valid 96 00010 00000 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Refresh PgDn PgUp ClrFarStats ClrNearStats Select 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 For the ESF line performance statistics the following performance statistics are kept for each 15 minute interval over the past 24 hour period A Near set and a Far set are kept for each statistic The Far set is based on information kept by the unit at the other end of the local loop and is only available when ANSI performance report messages are enabled in the unit Summary information that appears near the top of the screen includes Near Far Current Interval Timer Contains the number of seconds that have elapsed in the current 15 minute interval for the near or far information which can show a value up to 900 seconds Near Far ESF Error Events Maintains a count of ESF error events as specified by AT amp T TR 54016 which counts CRC and OOF events A maximum of 65 535 error events can be counted Once 65535 is reached it stays at that number until the network issues a reset command 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 5 35 O
142. e appropriate MIB object from NMS see your NMS documentation The unit performs a self test when it is reset Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu Use this procedure to initiate a reset and power on self test of the unit gt Procedure To reset the unit from the Control menu 1 2 From the Main Menu screen select Control Select Reset Device and press Enter The Are You Sure prompt appears Type y Yes and press Enter The unit reinitializes itself performing a self test Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power 9124 A2 LB20 00 Disconnecting then reconnecting the power cord resets the unit March 2000 6 3 Troubleshooting Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit Misconfiguring the unit could render the menu driven user interface inaccessible If this occurs connectivity to the unit can be restored via a directly connected asynchronous terminal B gt Procedure To reset COM port settings 1 Configure the asynchronous terminal to operate at 19 2 kbps using character length of 8 bits with one stop bit and no parity In addition set Flow Control to None 2 Reset the unit then hold the Enter key down until the System Paused screen appears See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication for other methods of resetting the unit 3 Tab to the desired prompt and type y Yes at one of the prompts If selecting The following occurs Reset COM Port usage Port Use
143. e functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit InjectErr ResetMon The ResetMon function key at the bottom of the screen only appears when a Monitor 511 test pattern is Active Select ResetMon to reset the monitor pattern error counter CAUTION You should not run these tests with frame relay equipment attached you must disconnect the frame relay equipment and use external test equipment 6 22 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Line Loopback 9124 A2 LB20 00 Troubleshooting The Line Loopback LLB loops the information received on the selected interface back to the source of the loopback When used with a pattern test at the remote node LLB determines whether the problem is with the sending device or the T1 facility Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests Line Loopback Bi Framer ther lt 4 l T1 All i LLB aoe Interface 1S 2 A l 97 15336 CAUTION This test may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted An LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active m Payload Loopback Send Remote Line Loopback or an active Monitor Pattern on this network interface Repeater Loopback on any other T1 interface with DSOs assigned to this network interface m Send FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on the synchronous
144. e limited by Disabling FTP access completely Requiring a user ID and password to login m Limiting FTP bandwidth B gt Procedure To limit FTP access when the session is not on the TS Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable FTP FTP Session to Disable Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login If you want to allow users to configure the unit or perform file transfers including downloads keep the access at Level 1 Level 1 access is required to download software to the unit or to upload or download configuration files Level 3 is sufficient for NMS access for SLV historical information Limit bandwidth for FTP FTP Max Receive Rate to a rate less than the network line speed typically less than or equal to the CIR This method is not recommended if SLV reports are desired since FTP is required to generate the reports 3 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about setting FTP configuration options 4 6 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Security and Logins Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link
145. e lost 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 3 7 Configuration Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units At a minimum the following configuration options must be set before deploying a a FrameSaver unit to a remote site m Node IP Address m Node Subnet Mask See Table 3 11 Node IP Options for a description of these options Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock Select System Information to set up or display the general SNMP name for the unit its location and a contact for the unit as well as to set the system clock Main Menu gt Control gt System Information The following information is available for viewing Save any entries or changes If the selectionis Enter the Device Name Unique name for device identification of up to 20 characters System Name SNMP system name can be up to 255 characters System Location System s physical location can be up to 255 characters System Contact Name and how to contact the system person can be up to 255 characters Date Current date in the month day year format mm dd yyyy Time Current time in the hours minutes format hh mm NOTE To clear existing information place the cursor in the Clear field Tab to the Clear field and press Enter See Chapter 4 Security and Logins to set up and administer logins 3 8 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Setting Up for Trap Dial Out An external m
146. e user data port DTPLB Active Port 1 A Data Terminal Payload Loopback DTPLB is active for the specified slot and port Lamp Test Active The Lamp Test is active causing the LEDs on the faceplate to flash on and off 1 nnnn indicates a DLC number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port March 2000 5 17 Operation and Maintenance 5 18 Table 5 8 Test Status Messages 2 of 2 Message What It Indicates LLB Active Network 1 DSX 1 A network Line Loopback LLB is active on the specified interface Monitor Pttn Active DLC nnnn frame_relay_link 1 2 The unit is monitoring a test pattern on the specified DLCI on the specified frame relay link Monitor Pttn Active Interface A Monitor Pattern test is active on the specified interface This test cannot be activated on user data ports that have Port Use set to Frame Relay No Test Active No tests are currently running PLB Active Network 1 DSX 1 A Payload Loopback PLB is active on the specified interface PVC Loopback Active DLCI nnnn frame_relay_link 1 2 A PVC Loopback is active on the specified DLCI on the frame relay link RLB Active Network 1 DSX 1 A network Repeater Loopback RLB is active on the specified
147. ected and the internal clock is providing timing for the unit The clock source will not automatically switch from internal until the primary clock source returns Secondary Clock Failed A failure of the secondary clock source configured for the unit is detected and the internal clock is providing the timing for the unit The clock source will not automatically switch from internal until the primary clock source returns SLV Timeout DLC nnnn frame relay link 1 2 3 An excessive number of SLV communication responses from the remote FrameSaver SLV unit have been missed on the specified multiplexed DLCI the DLCI is not suitable for user data When a hardware bypass capable device has been detected at the other end of the PVC and this condition occurs only user data for EDLCI 0 will be transmitted while this condition exists Two Level 1 Users Accessing Device Two Level 1 users are already using the menu driven user interface only two sessions can be active at one time 1 nnnn indicates a DLC number of 16 through 1007 2 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port 3 Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 4 of 4 Messag
148. ee Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 6 Troubleshooting should you be locked out inadvertently 3 Save your changes 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 4 3 Security and Logins Controlling External COM Port Device Access Dial in access can be controlled when an external device modem is connected to the units communication COM port The External Device Commands option must be set to AT or Other B gt Procedure To control dial in access 1 Select the External Modem options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt External Modem Com Port 2 Enable the Dial In Access configuration option This option only appears when the External Device Commands option is set to AT or Other 3 Save your change See Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about external device communication port configuration options Controlling Telnet or FTP Access The FrameSaver unit provides several methods for limiting access via a Telnet or FTP session Telnet or FTP access can be on a standard management link or on a service provider s troubleshooting TS management link 4 4 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Security and Logins Limiting Telnet Access 9124 A2 LB20 00 Telnet access can be limited by Disabling Telnet access completely Requiring a login for Telnet sessions that are not on the TS Management Link Assi
149. end of the PVC Standard RIP Routing Information Protocol allows the router to automatically learn the routes to all FrameSaver units connected to that FrameSaver unit March 2000 1 3 About the FrameSaver SLV 9124 1 4 Configuration Upload Download and Software Download Capability Provides quick transfer of configuration options to and from nodes and software downloads while the unit is running using the standard File Transfer Protocol FTP Two software images can be stored Dual Flash Memory Allows software upgrades while the unit is up and running Two software loads can be stored and implemented at the user s discretion ATM VPI VCI and DLCI Correlation For networks with both ATM and frame relay access endpoints allows the FrameSaver unit to report the originating Virtual Path or Channel Identifier VPI VCl in the far end ATM access endpoint where the local DLCI is mapped so they can be correlated for OpenLane SLV reports Back to Back Operation Allows two FrameSaver devices to be connected via a leased line network or simulation so a point to point configuration can be implemented OpenLane Service Level Management Solution Provides an advanced standards based performance monitoring and management application Being standards based the OpenLane SLM system can also be used with other management applications like HP OpenView or IBM s NetView OpenLane includes HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane features
150. ent and Communication Options The following options can be selected from the Management and Communication menu Node IP Options Management PVC Options m General SNMP Management Options Telnet and FTP Sessions Options m SNMP NMS Security Options SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options Communication Port Options m External Modem COM Port Options Configuring Node IP Information Select Node IP to display add or change the information necessary to support general IP communications for the node see Table 3 11 When deploying units to remote sites minimally configure the Node IP Address and Subnet Mask Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Node IP This set of configuration options includes a Troubleshooting TS Management Link feature to help service providers isolate device problems within their networks This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link Troubleshooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations No alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer TS_Management_Link is initially disabled in most models but the link can be enabled at any time Any valid network Management PVC created on a standard DLCI can be used When enabled a troubleshooting link can be accessed any time the service provider requests access An assigned security level can also control access When a DLCI has been defined as the troubleshooti
151. er Guide The sections that follow address only the minimal procedural steps needed once you have access to the applications See the Network Health User and Reports Guides for additional startup information and a full discussion of the application s features and how to use them 9 2 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Discovering FrameSaver Elements Once licenses are entered and you have access to the applications the Discover dialog box opens Use this dialog box to search for SLV units in your network and discover their DLCls Saving the results of the search creates definitions in the Poller Configuration which are used to poll the units IP addresses and the Community String for the FrameSaver units must be entered for Network Health to find the SLV units on the network and discover their elements These elements are resources that can be polled e g LAN WAN interfaces frame relay circuits routers and servers The two types of elements that can be polled are Statistics elements Provide counters and other gauges for information gathered about your network for statistical and trend analysis Conversation elements Provide RMON2 and similar data for information gathered about network traffic between nodes gt Procedure To find SLV device elements in your network 1 Select the LAN WAN radio button to specify the element type to be found Network Health treats frame
152. er and cable latency LEDs 6 2 6 13 and control leads displaying descriptions network and DSxX interface limiting async terminal access FTP access SNMP access through IP addresses 4 10 Telnet access March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Line Build Out LBO 3 24 Coding Format Equalization 3 31 Framing Format Loopback 6 23 Link Destination 3 47 frame relay statistics Protocol Source 3 46 Traps 3 60 Traps Interfaces troubleshooting management TS Management 3 50 linkUp and linkDown events 3 60 traps B 8 LLB 6 23 6 27 6 29 LMI and PVC availability Behavior 3 18 Clearing Event N3 3 19 3 41 configuring frame relay and Down 5 15 6 9 Error Event N2 3 18 3 41 frame relay statistics Heartbeat T1 3 19 3 41 Inbound Heartbeat T2 3 19 3 42 N4 Measurement Period T3 3 19 3 42 packet utility 6 5 Parameters 3 41 pass through 3 18 Protocol Status Enquiry N1 3 19 3 41 uploading packet capture data local external DTE loopback setting up management 3 14 locked out 4 3 4 11 6 4 LOF LED 5 5 logging in logging out Login creating 4 11 ID 4 11 modifying and deleting Required 3 55 B 64 H 3 _ 9124 A2 LB20 00 Index logins 4 1 Loopback Data Channel DTE 6 26 FT1 6 28 Line 6 23 Payload 6 24 Port DTE Initiated PVC 6 20 Remote 6 27
153. erarnsutedrdarsariidind amides en bude ESS DESE a 2 2 E MINM oreinen Er kir EL need ner es eer edmey ee DEEE 2 4 u Sereen Work ANCES sarsriaccsraesnra tompa aie iDa RD EDE 2 5 m Navigating the Screens cirsosirsicinsioipsiiemeiiinritiiiiikradEi 2 6 KODO NOVScGcccsretadicercnianiidertiienciGuacidensiaead 2 6 FUNGHON KEYS gea dudnsiarisidh ardraneatasts nadi Sarda aude a i 2 7 Selecting froma MOA i cack es endenes a teceaedeneedeedade 2 8 Switching Between Screen Areas 0 00 c cee cece eee 2 8 Selecting a Field i csc0ciscininatiiendienadedemdeca wie buded 2 9 Entering Informali ON kasoni E EE ERE EEE 2 9 3 Configuration W Basic Configuration ssissriccrkatanke ankron Enna E ERE ER 3 3 Configuration Option AreaS sicrenismiiisreiiaeriiis e eee eee aes 3 4 Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options 3 5 Changing Configuration Options sissi ssrrisnria tasis eee eee eee 3 6 saving Configuration OPNONS taianigcevsacecigieed ieecdeees de 3 7 Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units 3 8 m Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock 3 8 a Setting Up tor Trap Dial Out 224 s00cc00ccinadcaricnime EEDE 3 9 Setting Up an External Modem for Trap Dial Out 3 9 Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out 3 9 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 Contents ii Setting Up Auto Configuration 00 3 10 Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode
154. erface This helps to indicate that the FrameSaver unit is operational Main Menu Test Network Physical Tests Repeater Loopback An attached device or test equipment should generate and monitor data to be looped back Oth Framer lt _ er 4 t T1 RLB AIS Nt Interface gt ae eee l 97 15338 The T1 NAM will not respond to any messages from the network during this test CAUTION This test may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted An RLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active m Payload Loopback Send Remote Line Loopback or an active Monitor Pattern on this network interface m All loopbacks on the DSX 1 interface m Send FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on the synchronous data port March 2000 6 25 Troubleshooting DTE Loopback The DTE external Loopback DTLB test loops the received signal on a DTE interface back to the DTE without affecting the operation of the remaining ports Use this test for isolating problems on the DTE interface An attached device or test equipment must generate data to be looped back DSX Network Interface Interface gt DTLB DTLB DTE DTE Port 2 Port 1 98 16190 This test may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port A
155. erface selected is available for use Enable The interface is available Disable The interface is not available for use If there are time slots assigned to the DSX 1 interface when you attempt to disable it the message This action will clear all DSX 1 Cross Connections Are You Sure No appears If you select No The operation is cancelled Yes The following occurs m All existing DSX 1 interface cross connect assignments are cleared Alarms or traps associated with the DSX 1 interface are not generated LEDs associated with the DSX 1 interface are held in an off state Line Framing Format Possible Settings D4 ESF Default Setting ESF Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the DSX 1 interface D4 Uses D4 framing format ESF Uses Extended Superframe ESF framing format Line Coding Format Possible Settings AMI B8ZS Default Setting B8ZS Specifies the line coding format for the DSX 1 interface AMI Uses Alternate Mark Inversion AMI line coding format B8ZS Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS line coding format 3 30 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Table 3 6 DSX 1 Physical Interface Options 2 of 2 Line Equalization Possible Settings 0 133 133 266 266 399 399 533 533 655 Default Setting 0 133 Permits a standard DSX signal to be delivered over a distance of up to 655
156. erformance indicators onto a single page Up to ten DLCls can be included in an At a Glance Report Using the FrameSaver SLV report on page 9 9 you can compare a DLCIl s volume with the network s performance over a specified period of time Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables availability bandwidth bytes health exceptions and latency These ranges need to be set before reports are scheduled In addition all the enhanced network statistics that only an SLV device can accurately collect is provided so you can truly monitor the health of the frame relay network and see the effects of the customer s utilization on network efficiency 9 6 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 About Trend Reports Printed Reports Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices By specifying specific variables like bandwidth trend analysis can be performed and shown on Trend Reports Up to ten variables for a DLCI or ten DLCls on one variable can be generated on a single trend report Information can be presented in a line graph pie chart bar chart or table format Any amount of time can be specified for the reporting period These reports can help identify the reasons a DLCI has acquired a poor Health Index rating See the Exceptions Report for information about Health Index ratings All of the charts and tables seen online can also be provided on printed reports Reports Applicable to SLV Devices 9124 A2 LB20 00 T
157. es can be copied to a host to provide a backup To use this feature the unit must be configured to support Telnet and FTP Sessions Using this feature you can transfer configuration files to from a FrameSaver node program files to a FrameSaver node and User History data froma FrameSaver node through a user data port or the network interface using a management PVC or through the COM port Be aware of the following rules when doing a file transfer You must have Access Level 1 permission to use the put and get commands However you can retrieve the data file for the user history reports regardless of access level You cannot put a configuration file to the factory cfg or current cfg files under the system directory Configuration files should be put to a customer file cust1 cfg or cust2 cfg then loaded into the downloaded unit s Current Configuration via the menu driven user interface m You can only put a NAM program file nam ocd into a FrameSaver unit You cannot get a program file from the FrameSaver unit to a host Before putting a download file you must use the bin binary command to place the data connection in binary transfer mode m When transferring SLV user history information to the NMS you can only get a uhbcfull dat file It is recommended that you use the NMS application to get this information see Transferring Collected Data A data file uhbcfull dat or Imitrace syc cannot be put into a FrameSaver no
158. essages contained in the following sections are in alphabetical order 5 12 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance System and Test Status Messages 9124 A2 LB20 00 System and test status information is selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status System and Test Status The following information is included on this screen Self Test Results Messages Health and Status Messages m Test Status Messages Self Test Results Messages These self test result messages appear in the Self Test Results field at the top of the System and Test Status screen Table 5 6 Self Test Results Messages Message What It Indicates What To Do Failure XXXXXXXX An internal failure occurred 1 Record the failure code XXXXXXXX represents an 8 digit hexadecimal failure code used by service 3 Contact your service personnel representative Record the failure code before resetting the unit otherwise the error information will be lost 2 Reset the unit Passed No problems were found No action needed during power on or reset March 2000 5 13 Operation and Maintenance 5 14 Health and Status Messages The following table provides Health and Status messages that apply to the FrameSaver 9124 unit Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 1 of 4 Message What It Indicates AIS at DSX 1 An Alarm Indication Signal AIS is received by the DSX 1 interface AIS is
159. etting Up Auto Configuration The auto configuration feature allows you to select a method of automatic configuration and connection of DLCls within the FrameSaver unit as well as to automatically remove DLCls and connections that are no longer supported by the network service provider Auto configuration also maintains associated DLCI option settings when Standard LMI is used on the network interface Main Menu gt Auto Configuration Auto Configuration Screen Example main auto configuration 9124 IT Device Name Node A 1 26 1999 23 32 AUTO CONF IGURATION Frame Relay Discovery Mode 1MPort Automatic Circuit Removal Enable Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Save 3 10 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is active the FrameSaver unit discovers network DLCls from the network LMI status response message It configures a network DLCI a user data port DLCI and automatically connects them to create a PVC Main Menu Auto Configuration Frame Relay Discovery Mode Automatically configured network DLCls are multiplexed and each automatically configured port DLCI carries the same DLCI Number as its corresponding network DLCI These are the same DLC numbers that would have been available had the FrameSaver unit not been inserted in the link between your equipment and the network NOTE A local Manageme
160. etting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 4 Click on the button to the right of indicated fields for a drop down list from which selections can be made Minimally configure the following fields Field Select or Enter Domain User Defined DLCI DLCI number for trap being assigned Stats Type PARADYNE Trap Variable Trap variable to be configured Key1 The iflndex for the frame relay logical interface is 1 Key2 DLCI number same as DLCI above Type Absolute or Delta radio button Rising Falling or Both radio button 2 Threshold Value that will trigger a trap 1 Latency MIB variables should be Absolute all others should be Delta 2 Generally Rising is selected 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add this alarm 6 Repeat Steps 3 through 5 until all traps are configured for all DLCls Refer to Configuring Alarms in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information 8 12 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Creating History Files 9124 A2 LB20 00 Up to 14 additional user history tables can be created in the FrameSaver unit for each interface An interface is a specific DLCI or the entire frame relay interface A table must be created for each DLCI or frame relay link to be monitored Additional user history tables are created using the command line prompt in NetSco
161. eturn to the Change Operating Mode screen and switch back to Standard Operation 2 Respond Yes to the prompt and save the change The units can be reconnected to a standard frame relay network 3 16 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Configuration Option Tables Configuration option descriptions contained in this chapter are in menu order even though this may not be the order in which you access each when configuring the unit The following configuration option tables are included Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options Table 3 3 General System Options Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options Table 3 5 Data Port Physical Interface Options Table 3 6 DSX 1 Physical Interface Options Table 3 7 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values when Assigning DSX 1 to Network Time Slots Cross Connections Table 3 8 Interface Frame Relay Options Table 3 9 DLCI Record Options Table 3 10 PVC Connection Options Table 3 11 Node IP Options Table 3 12 Management PVC Options Table 3 13 General SNMP Management Options Table 3 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options Table 3 15 SNMP NMS Security Options Table 3 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options Table 3 17 Communication Port Options Table 3 18 External Modem COM Port Options Configuring the Overall System The System menu includes the following 9124 A2 LB20 00 Frame Relay and LMI Service Level Verificati
162. etwork DLCI Up Time Days hours minutes and seconds since the DLCI was last declared Active after a period of inactivity Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive If the DLCI was Down this is the amount of time since the DLCI recovered If the DLCI was never Down this is the amount of time since the unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network Total Tx Frames Tx Octets a Within CIR Between CIR amp EIR Above EIR m With DE Set Total number of data frames and octets 8 bit bytes transmitted for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link The number of frames and octets sent by the far end device for on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were within the committed information rate The number of frames and octets sent by the far end device on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate The number of frames and octets sent by the far end device on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were above the excess information rate The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set 1 Only appears for the network interface Frame Relay Delivery Ratio delivered frames offered frames Data Delivery Ratio delivered octets offered octets 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 5 29 Operation and Maintenance Tabl
163. expanded view of the data Eiis Mine Forai BE ESSERE SAE Bl 16 L221 T AL Load eS Se aA Be ey ieee ee RETE SE a nn n n 1 ETAF ER EETEFETENAETE E 8 Click anywhere on this window to return to the previous window view see Step 7 of this procedure Refer to Launching User History and Understanding Custom History Display in Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information See Object ID Cross References Numeric Order in Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Default to identify OID information being shown Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus Once the FrameSaver SLV agent has been added to NetScout Manager Plus select either the Traffic or Protocol radio button to monitor the newly added agent or one of its DLCIs NOTE Only the Traffic and Protocol radio buttons on the application selection bar are supported for FrameSaver SLV agents The procedure below describes how to monitor an agent s traffic The procedure is the same for protocol monitoring but you may be prompted to select a Domain Group as well as an agent or DLCI 8 18 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices gt Procedure 1 Select the Traffic radio button to monitor the newly added agent or one of its DLCls 2 Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCls appear in the DLCI list box under the agent list box 3 I
164. f information contained in the captured packet either Sequence Number Exchange or Full Status Report m The send and receive rcv sequence numbers from the captured packet 0 255 On the Packets Received side of the screen PVC status for up to ten DLCls can be shown It shows the DLCI number its active bit status and if Standard LMI is running the DLCl s CIR value 6 6 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Alarms 9124 A2 LB20 00 Troubleshooting The following table describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP trap for a physical interface and the frame relay LMIs and DLCls These alarm conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System and Test Status screen Main Menu gt Status System and Test Status Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 1 of 6 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do AIS at Network 1 AIS at DSX 1 An Alarm Indication Signal AIS is being received by the interface AIS is an unframed all ones signal For the DSX 1 interface the attached DTE is transmitting an AIS For the network interface report the problem to your T1 service provider For the DSX 1 interface check the DTE attached to the interface EER at Network 1 The error rate of the received network signal exceeds the currently configured threshold This condition only occurs if the network interface is configured for ESF framing This condition clears when the err
165. f you want to monitor one of the agent s DLCls highlight the DLCI to be monitored 4 Click on an applicable icon The selected graphical report should open Traffic icons that would be of particular interest are Traffic Monitor and Domain History In the example below the Domain History icon was selected which is actually a real time report Fale View Format Gefrech Apelicwtions Hall p NetScout AMON History Gronsiad Imag ESE EE Han Sep H NOTE If Size Distribution is the selected View and distribution size has been changed via OpenLane the values shown for the distribution will not be accurate Only default size distributions are tracked 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 8 19 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Statistical Windows Supported 8 20 Not all icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window are supported for FrameSaver units For example All Convs conversations and TopNConv icons appear when the Protocol radio button is selected but conversations are not supported Of the icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window the following are supported Traffic Statistics Protocol Statistics Traffic Monitor Protocol Monitor Segment Zoom Protocol Zoom Segment Details 1 TopNTalkers Domain History All Talkers 1 Size distribution statistics are provided for a DLCI only not a link If a link is selected all size dist
166. figuration Control Auto C onfiguration Load Configuration from Network Data Ports Time Slot Assignment PVC Co Manage nnections ment and Menu Hierarchy MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Communication Time Slot Assignment Frame Relay To Network Assignments DSX 1 To Network Assignments Clear Assignments PVC Connection Table Source Link DLCI EDLCI Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI New or Modify PVC Connection Entry Control Modem Call Directories System Information Device Name System Name Location Contact Date Time 9124 A2 LB20 00 System Information Administer Logins e Login ID Password Access Level New Administer Logins Change Operating Mode Select Software Release LMI Packet Capture Utility Disconnect Modem Reset Device Management and Communication Options Node IP Management PVCs General SNMP Management Telnet and FTP Session SNMP NMS Security SNMP Traps Communication Port External Modem Com Port Yo New or Modify Management PVC Entry MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Select Software Release e Current Release Alternate Release Switch amp Reset March 2000 LMI Packet Capture Utility Capture Interface e Packet Capture Start Stop Status e Packets in Buffer Display
167. g 10 Specifies the maximum duration of the tests Display Conditions This option only appears when Test Timeout is set to Enable 1 120 Sets the Test Timeout period in minutes inclusive Primary Clock Source Possible Settings Net1 DSX Internal Default Setting Net1 Allows you to select the primary clock source for the unit The source selected provides all of the timing within the FrameSaver unit and the clocks for all of the external interfaces Failure of the clock specified by this configuration option results in automatic fallback to the Secondary Clock Source configuration option setting NOTE For the Primary and Secondary Clock Source options only Internal can be selected for both options All other selections must have different settings e g if Primary Clock Source is set to Net1 Secondary Clock Source cannot be set to Net1 Net1 The primary clock is derived from the Network1 T1 interface DSX The primary clock is derived from the DSX T1 interface This setting only appears if the DSX 1 interface is installed and enabled see Configuring the DSX 1 Interface Internal The primary clock is the internal clock 3 22 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Table 3 3 General System Options 2 of 2 Secondary Clock Source Possible Settings Net1 DSX Internal Default Setting Internal Provides a secondary clock source when the primary clock source fai
168. gned time slot Ntt pressing the spacebar causes this field s values to cycle through all valid DSX 1 time slots starting with Ds p yy assuming it is unassigned lf Ds p tt is already assigned the next valid time slot in the order described above is displayed 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 3 35 Configuration 3 36 gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Configuration Time Slot Assignment DSX to Network Assignments The DSX 1 to Network Assignments screen appears This screen contains a matrix of the current cross connect status of all time slots on the network interface 2 Move the cursor to the next time slot that can be edited underlined Use the spacebar or type in the desired time slot to display its time slot assignment 3 Repeat Step 2 until all desired time slots are assigned 4 Save the configuration DSX 1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning Page 2 The second page of the DSX 1 to Network Assignments screen allows you to define the signaling assignments and trunk conditioning for each time slot on the DSX 1 interface You can specify whether robbed bit signaling information is being passed within a given DSO and the value of the signaling bits that will be transmitted for that DSO to the other cross connected T1 network interface if a Carrier Group Alarm CGA occurs on a T1 network interface DSX 1 to Network Time Slot Assignment Screen Example Page 2 main config tslot_assign dsx
169. gning an access level for Telnet sessions Disabling TS Management Link access To limit Telnet access via a service provider s troubleshooting management link see Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link B gt Procedure To limit Telnet access when the session is not on the TS Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable Telnet access Telnet Session to Disable Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login Assign an access level Session Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the Telnet session e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 telnet access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 3 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about setting Telnet configuration options March 2000 4 5 Security and Logins Limiting FTP Access FTP access can b
170. he NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay radio button still selected select the Traffic radio button The appropriate icons appear 2 Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCls appear in the DLCI list box under the agent list box 3 Highlight the DLCI to be monitored 4 Click on the Custom History icon The NetScout Custom History window opens Adjust the size of the window so the entire report can be viewed LLW Lab Lib LA ee A LMA ETSENEELEE ETEENRATALE CGA Oe a1 ALEI 8 16 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 5 Select History List from the View menu The History List window opens The newly defined user history variables should appear on this list Hiefearu List Histoyl into x Cancel 6 Highlight the desired set of user history variables and select the OK button Data is gathered based upon the configured user history variables This may take some time so please be patient 7 Select 2D or 3D Bar from the Format menu if desired 3D Bar is shown Eib Wine Furst Help bia thie biai 12i Bed tha Fi ALLRA EET ee tere EEEE ere renee varie Pe erer ines eT 0261 40 15 2 IAT 126 LA AA SALI 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 8 17 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Using the 2D or 3D Bar to view the user history data collected you can click on a particular bar and get an
171. he following frame relay reports support FrameSaver SLV units Exception Reports Provide summary and detail information that identifies DLCls with the highest incidence of errors high bandwidth utilization and trends These reports identify those DLCls that have exceeded a specified number of accumulated exception points It is a good idea to run this report daily so that DLCls having the most problems can be attended to first DLCls contained on this report need immediate attention If a DLCI suddenly shows up on these reports check whether any new equipment has been added to the network and whether it is properly configured If its configuration is correct the equipment could be faulty Summary Reports Provide summary information for the network volume and error leaders and DLCI traffic Network Summary Report Provides an overall view of the network Use this report for planning and to predict when a DLCI might run into problems Leaders Summary Report Identifies DLCls having the highest volume and errors High traffic volume may be increasing latency and the high Health Index rating indicates problems It is a good idea to run these reports daily so a norm can be established The same DLCls should appear Use this chart and table to alert you to possible problems Problems to look for include a normally high volume DLCI is dropped from the list a new DLCI appears on the list check Element Summaries a
172. he signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an PLAR D3 interface ABCD 1111 PLAR3busy PLAR4idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a PLAR D4 interface ABCD 1111 PLAR4idle PLAR4busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an PLAR D4 interface ABCD 0000 PLAR4busy DPO idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a DPO interface ABCD 0000 DPT idle DPO busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for a DPO interface ABCD 1111 DPT busy DPT idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a DPT interface ABCD 0000 DPO idle DPT busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for a DPT interface ABCD 1111 DPO busy USER xxxx The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent a user defined pattern of ABCD xxxx USER xxxx 1 xxxx is the same value on both the Network and the DSX 1 sides Clearing Assignments Clearing assignmen
173. hen Line Coding Format is set to B8ZS 62411 Inserts a one in the data after 15 consecutive zeros are received or the density of ones falls below 12 5 This setting complies with AT amp T TR 62411 but is not recommended for frame relay data because it inserts errors in the data traffic Disable Disables bit stuffing Ones density is not enforced on data sent to the network Transmit Timing Possible Settings System Interface Default Setting System Allows transmit timing to be selected from either the system master clock source or from the currently selected interface System Transmit timing is derived from the current system clock source see Table 3 3 General System Options Interface Transmit timing is derived from this interface NOTE When Interface is configured the clock must be synchronized to the system clock source Network Initiated LLB Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Allows the initiation and termination of the line loopback LLB to be controlled by the receipt of LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands from the network Enable LLB is controlled by LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands Receiving a LLB Actuate command causes the FrameSaver unit to enter a line loopback provided an LLB can be performed in the FrameSaver unit s current state Receiving an LLB Release command terminates the LLB Disable The FrameSaver unit ignores the LLB Ac
174. ies File Select paradyne Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add the agent discover its DLCls and return to the Configuration Manager main window The frame relay agent just entered appears in the agent list box with its DLCls in the DLCI list box at the bottom of the screen Select the Test button fourth button down center of the screen to make sure you can communicate with the agent Refer to Adding Frame Relay Agents in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information 8 4 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Verifying Domains and Groups B gt Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window age Berea Pet le at tar L Pee Li IF eres lfl mid BE LE Biri Hert farm o larren a os Piniss Palli TLE EE mi om EEE 2 Verify that only FrameSaver SLV supported domains appear listed in the Domain column FrameSaver SLV supported domains include ATALK IPX RMON DECNET NETB SNA IP NET VINES IPV6 OSI 3 Verify that S statistics collection appears for each domain listed in the Group column H hosts appears for the IP domain only Dashes occupy all other positions under the Group col
175. ies a name for the management PVC Only appears when a management PVC name is defined for the node For example when the network is connected to a remote device located in the London office London can be specified as the PVC name which is the link between the local FrameSaver unit and the one located in London London would appear as one of the available selections 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 3 49 Configuration Table 3 11 Node IP Options 2 of 2 TS Management Link Available Settings None PVCname Default Setting None Specifies a troubleshooting management link for the special needs of network service providers If the option is changed from the management PVC name to None the Delete the Management PVC PVCname and the associated DLCI Record prompt appears If you select No The link designation is removed and the option is set to None Yes The link designation is removed and the option is set to None and the link and its DLCI will be deleted None Disables or does not specify a TS Management Link PVCname Specifies the name of the TS Management PVC Display Conditions This selection only appears when a dedicated Management PVC has been defined on the network frame relay link as a DLCI with DLCI Type set to Standard TS Management Link Access Level Available Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest access level allowed when accessi
176. imary clock source returns Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends Contact your network provider March 2000 6 11 Troubleshooting 6 12 Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 6 of 6 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do Self Test Failure The unit did not pass its basic verification tests when it was powered on or reset Reset the unit Contact your service representative SLV Timeout DLCI nnnn frame relay link 1 2 An excessive number of SLV communication responses from the remote system have been missed on the specified multiplexed DLCI and link If the frame relay link is Net1 FR1 the timeout is on the network FrameRly1 timeslot assignment When a hardware bypass capable device has been detected at the other end of the PVC and this condition occurs only user data for EDLCI 0 will be transmitted as long as the condition exists Verify that the network LMI is up If it is contact your network service provider Yellow at DSX 1 A yellow alarm signal is received on the DSX 1 interface DTE has detected a LOS or OOF condition Check that the DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends Check the status of the attached equipment Yellow at Network 1 A yellow alarm signal is received on the network interface Network cable problem T1 facility problem Check that your network cable is sec
177. interface Send Pttn Active DLCI nnnn frame_relay_link 1 2 The unit is monitoring the selected test pattern on the specified DLCI for the interface Send Pttn Active Interface A Send Pattern test is active on the specified interface This test cannot be activated on user data ports that have Port Use set to Frame Relay 1 nnnn indicates a DLC number of 16 through 1007 2 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Network LMI Reported DLCIs Status 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Network LMl reported DLCI statuses are selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status LMI Reported DLCIs The LMI Reported DLCls screen displays the status and CIR if supported by the switch for each DLCI whether the DLCI is configured or not LMI Reported DLCls Status Screen Example main status 1mi_dicis Device Name Node A STATUS Active Inactive Deleted Inactive Inactive Inactive Active Inactive Active 520 Active DLCI is configured on the Frame Relay Link Refresh PgUp PgDn frame relay link LMI REPORTED DLCIs CIR bps 16000 256000 64000 STATUS Active Active Deleted Active Active Active ESC for previous menu PrevLink 9124 II 05 26 1999 23 32 Page 1 of 2
178. ion and one active asynchronous terminal session or two simultaneous asynchronous terminal sessions Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access Direct asynchronous terminal access to the menu driven user interface can be limited by m Requiring a login m Assigning an access level to the port or interface See Configuring the Communication Port in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about communication COM port configuration options 4 2 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Security and Logins B gt Procedure To limit asynchronous terminal access to the menu driven user interface 1 Select the Communication Port options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Communication Port 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login Limit the effective access level to Port Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 Level Level 2 Evers oreve NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the port e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 port access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow Level 1 users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 NOTE S
179. ion of digital data communications equipment and frame relay networks Section Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Description About the FrameSaver SLV 9124 Identifies how the FrameSaver 9124 unit fits into a Service Level Management SLM solution and describes the unit s features User Interface and Basic Operation Shows how to navigate the user interface Configuration Provides configuration information for the FrameSaver 9124 Security and Logins Provides procedures for controlling access to the FrameSaver SLV and setting up logins Operation and Maintenance Provides procedures to display unit identification information and perform file transfers as well as how to display and interpret status and statistical information Troubleshooting Provides device problem resolution alarm and other information as well as troubleshooting and test procedures March 2000 Vii About This Guide Section Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Index Description Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices Identifies where installation and setup information is located and how FrameSaver units are supported Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Describes setup of the NetScout Manager Plus application so it supports FrameSaver units Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Describes
180. is column when LMI Protocol is set to Standard If blank the switch does not support this feature 1 Appears for 10 seconds only before the network changes Deleted to Inactive and New to Active March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance PVC Connection Status PVC connection statuses are selected from the Status menu Main Menu Status PVC Connection Status Only PVC connections with Source DLCls configured to be Active are shown PVC Connection Status Screen Example main status connections 9124 II Device Name Node A 05 26 1999 23 32 Page 1 of 2 PVC CONNECTION STATUS Source Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Link DLCI EDLCI Status Port 1 201 Net1 FR1 300 Active Port 1 202 Net1 FR1 1001 Active Port 1 100 Net1 FR1 1001 Active Port 1 204 Net1 FR1 1001 Active Mgmt PVC Mgm205 Net1 FR1 1001 Active Port 1 206 Net1 FR1 1001 Active Port 1 207 Net1 FR1 1001 Active Port 1 208 Net1 FR1 500 Active Port 1 209 Net1 FR1 502 Inactive Net1 FR1 Inactive ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh PgDn Ifthe No PVC Connections message appears instead of a list of PVC connections no PVC connections have been configured yet Table 5 10 PVC Connection Status 1 of 2 Field Status What It Indicates Link Identifies the cross connection of DLCls configured for the unit Net1 FR1 Source destination is frame relay link 1 on Network 1 Port 1 User data port Port 1 Mgmt
181. is set to Terminal so the asynchronous terminal can be used Data Rate Kbps Character Length Stop Bits and Parity are reset to the factory defaults Unit resets itself Reload Factory Defaults All configuration and control settings are reset to the Default Factory Configuration overwriting the current configuration Unit resets itself CAUTION This causes the current configuration to be destroyed and a self test to be performed If no selection is made within 30 seconds or if No n is entered the unit resets itself and no configuration changes are made Once the unit resets itself connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen appears 6 4 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Management Link Feature A dedicated troubleshooting management link is available to help service providers isolate device problems within their networks This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link and troubleshooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations No alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer See Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 3 Configuration for additional information about this feature LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature A packet capture utility has been provided to aid with problem isolation when LMI errors are detected Using this utility any enabled frame relay link on the user data
182. isplay Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF 10E 4 Declares an EER if more than 1 535 CRC6 errors are detected in a 10 second period Clears when fewer than 1 536 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 5 Declares an EER if more than 921 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 922 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 6 Declares an EER if more than 92 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1075 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 93 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 7 Declares an EER if more than 9 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1076 or 1075 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 10 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 8 Declares an EER if more than 41 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 1077 10 76 10 5 10 4 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 42 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 9 Declares an EER if more than 4 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 1078 10 7 10 6 10 5 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 5 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period Circuit Identifier Possible Settings Text Field Clear Default Setting blank Identifies the transmis
183. itoring control only The user can monitor and display status and configuration screens only March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Table 3 17 Communication Port Options 3 of 4 Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity no keyboard activity Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity Disable Does not disconnect user session Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the session is disconnected Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal 1 60 Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes inclusive IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the unit via the COM port Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the COM port which you can view or edit
184. k Health polls it If O kbps is the speed setting you will need to edit the unit s CIR from Network Health Additional information that can be edited as well See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional information gt Procedure To change the CIR for FrameSaver SLV unit elements from Network Health 1 Select the Edit Before Saving button at the bottom of the Discovering dialog box once the discovery process is completed The Poller Configuration window opens Double click on the first element discovered The Modify Element dialog box opens In the Speed box select the Override radio button and enter the CIR for the unit in the text box Letters k and m can be used as shortcuts e g enter 56 k for 56 kilobits per second or 16 m for 16 Mbits per second Apply your changes Select the Apply Next button to save your change and bring up the next element to be edited Continue until all newly discovered frame relay elements have been modified before selecting the OK button Select the the OK button The Modify Element dialog box closes Select the OK button at the bottom of the Poller Configuration window The modified elements are saved to the database and the units are polled Allow Network Health to continue polling for about a half an hour to allow time for data to be gathered before running any reports 9 4 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Setting Up Network Health for Fra
185. l Verification Options must be enabled for these statistics to appear NA appears instead of a statistical count if FDR DDR Frame Delivery Ratio Data Delivery Ratio information is not being received from the far end device The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were above the committed information rate and were dropped in transit The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were within within the committed information rate but were dropped in transit The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate and were dropped in transit The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were above the excess information rate and were dropped in transit Latest RdTrip Latency Current round trip latency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection Unknown appears if communication with the far end device is not successful Avg RdTrip Latency Average round trip latency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection Average round trip latency is measured every SLV sampling interval and the average is computed using packets with the configured SLV Packet Size bytes Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options over the previous 15 minute peri
186. le Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether frames packets sent on a management PVC have the Discard Eligible DE bit set This bit is used by the network to prioritize which frames to discard first during periods of network congestion This allows management traffic to be viewed as lower priority than customer data Enable Sets the DE bit to one on all frames sent on the management PVC Disable Sets the DE bit to zero on all frames sent on the management PVC This is the recommended setting particularly for NSPs providing a managed network service Primary Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Port 1 Clear Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface to use for this management PVC The interface selected must have at least one DLCI or DLCI with EDLCI defined which is not part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC Net1 FR1 Specifies that the network interface be used in the connection Port 1 Specifies that the frame relay link on the user data port be used in the connection Clear Clears the link and the DLCI field and suppresses the EDLCI field if the DLCI was multiplexed March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Table 3 12 Management PVC Options 3 of 3 Primary DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the DLCI number used for the management PVC
187. le Interval secs in seconds SLV Delivery Ratio Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether communication of Frame and Data Delivery Ratios FDR DDR between FrameSaver SLV devices is enabled To use this capability both ends of all PVCs must be FrameSaver SLV devices If some of the units are FrameSaver 9124s or 9624s they must be running software version 1 2 or higher Enable An extra byte for FDR DDR statistics collection is included with each frame which is used at the receiving end to determine the amount of data dropped by the network Disable Extra byte is not included DLCI Down on SLV Timeout Available Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether missed SLV packets will be monitored along with the LMI status to determine the status of PVC connections to remote FrameSaver units NOTE This option does not apply to multiplexed DLCls connected to a far end unit with hardware bypass capability Enable After the configured threshold for missed SLV packets has been exceeded causing the DLCl s status to turn Inactive an alarm and SNMP trap are generated and a Health and Status message created Disable Missed SLV communications will not be monitored SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 3 Specifies the number of consecutive missed SLV communications that must be de
188. lecting from a Menu Switching Between Screen Areas Selecting a Field Entering Information What appears on the screens depends on Current configuration How your network is currently configured Security access level The security level set by the system administrator for each user Data selection criteria What you entered in previous screens 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 2 1 User Interface and Basic Operation Logging On 2 2 Start a session using one of the following methods m Telnet session via An in band management channel through the frame relay network A local in band management channel configured on the DTE port between the FrameSaver unit and the router Dial in connection using the internal modem Direct terminal connection over the COM port When logging on the User Interface Idle screen appears f no security was set up or security was disabled the Main Menu screen appears see page 2 4 You can begin your session m f security was set up and is enabled you are prompted for a login Enter your login ID and password When the user interface has been idle a session is automatically ended and the screen goes blank when the unit times out Press Enter to reactivate the interface B gt Procedure To log in when security is being enforced 1 Type your assigned Login ID and press Enter 2 Type your Password and press Enter Valid characters All pri
189. ling period ALM Alarm Yellow ON An alarm condition is present on the network DSX interface Current alarm conditions Alarm Indication Signal AIS Excessive Error Rate EER Loss of Signal LOS Loss of Frame LOF Out of Frame OOF a Yellow Alarm Signal OFF No alarm condition is present on the Network DSX interface Table 5 3 User Data Port LED Label Indication Color What It Means OK Operational Green ON The interchange circuits for the port Status are in the correct state to transmit and receive data OFF The port is idle Occurs if the port is disabled or if the port is configured to monitor DTR and or RTS and the lead s is not asserted March 2000 5 5 Operation and Maintenance Control Lead Descriptions For the network and DSX 1 interfaces see Table 5 2 Network and DSX 1 Interface LEDs for descriptions of these leads The LED descriptions and control lead descriptions are the same For Port 1 see Table 5 4 User Data Port LED These indicators show the current state of each control lead and what they indicate when they are highlighted that is in the On state Table 5 4 User Data Port Control Leads Label Indication What It Means OK Operational Status The user data port is operational able to transmit and receive data TXD Transmit Data Data is being sent to the far end device RXD Receive Data Data is being received from the far end device DTR
190. ll directories device naming login administration and selecting software releases You can also initiate a power on reset of the FrameSaver unit See Appendix A Menu Hierarchy for a pictorial view of the menu hierarchy which represents the organization of the FrameSaver unit s menus and screens 2 4 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 User Interface and Basic Operation Screen Work Areas There are two user work areas Screen area Where you input information into fields Function keys area Where you perform specific screen functions Below is a sample configuration screen Model Number Menu Path Date and Time main config system slv 9124 II Device Name Node A 01 26 1999 23 32 Device SERVICE LEVEL VERIFICATION SYSTEM OPTIONS Name SLV Sample Interval secs 60 SLV Delivery Ratio Disable DLCI Down on SLV Timeout Enable Screen SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold E Area SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold 1 g SLV Packet Size bytes 64 SLV Synchronization Role Tributary Function Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Keys Area Save Message Area Screen Format Description Menu Path Menu selections made to reach the current screen Device Name Customer assigned identification of the FrameSaver unit 9124 Il FrameSaver unit s model number Screen Area Selection display and input fields for monitoring and maintaining the FrameSaver unit
191. ll status enquiry is initiated Applies to the user side of a UNI only 1 255 Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated before a full status enquiry is initiated LMI Heartbeat T1 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 10 Configures the LMI defined T1 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI Applies to the user side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 March 2000 3 41 Configuration 3 42 Table 3 8 Interface Frame Relay Options 3 of 3 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies to the network side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Configures the LMI defined T3 parameter which is the time interval in seconds that the network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry messages that have been received N4 from the user side 5 30
192. llation an IP Ping test is typically run from the remote site to Ping the NMS at the central site The remote FrameSaver unit must have SNMP trap managers configured and one of those trap managers must be the central site NMS Select Procedure 2 to Ping the NMS at the central site To test the path to the NMS trap managers during installation of the central site FrameSaver unit The remote FrameSaver unit must have configured the SNMP trap managers to be sent the Ping Select Procedure 2 to Ping the SNMP trap managers p gt Procedure 1 To Ping any far end FrameSaver unit 1 Select the IP Ping test Main Menu gt Test gt IP Ping 2 Enter the IP Address of the device the Ping is being sent to then select Start NOTE If the FrameSaver unit has just initialized or the far end unit has just initialized it may take about a minute for the units to learn the routes via the proprietary RIP 3 Verify the results of the IP Ping test While the test is running In Progress is displayed in the Status field When the test is finished Alive Latency nn ms should appear as the Status nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds If any other message is displayed additional testing will be required 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 6 31 Troubleshooting B gt Procedure 2 To Ping the NMS at the central site 1 Verify that the central site NMS has the FrameSaver unit s IP address in its routing t
193. lnet session was attempted Wait and try again Destination Not Unique Destination entered is already being used Enter another destination indicator DLCI in connection Delete connection first User tried to delete a DLCI that was part of a connection No action needed or Delete the connection then delete the DLCI Duplicate DLCI Number DLCI number entered is not unique for the frame relay link No action needed previous contents of the DLCI number field is restored File Transfer Complete Seen at an FTP terminal A file transfer was performed successfully Switch to the newly downloaded software See Changing Software March 2000 5 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 5 Device Messages 2 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do File Transfer Failed Invalid file Seen at an FTP terminal A file transfer was attempted but it was not successful Try again making sure you type the filename correctly Exit the FTP session or download another file See Changing Software Invalid Character x A non valid printable ASCII character has been entered Reenter information using valid characters Invalid date must be mm dd yyyy A non valid date was entered on the System Information screen Reenter the date in the month day 4 digit year format Invalid date and or time A non valid d
194. lows Port 1 s LMI Used at central sites this setting is useful when the remote site router on the other end of the PVC connection can initiate recovery via a redundant central site when there is a catastrophic central site LAN or router failure Not recommended for NSPs Port 1_Follows_Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on Port 1 when LMI on the network interface goes down disabling Port 1 and deasserting its control leads When LMI on the network interface comes back up Port 1 is reenabled and its control leads are reasserted The LMI state on Port 1 has no effect on the LMI state on the network interface That is Port 1 s LMI follows the network interface s LMI This setting is useful if the router connected to Port 1 is used to initiate recovery when network failures are detected Port 1_Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on Port 1 goes down or LMI down on Port 1 when LMI on the network interface goes down and allows LMI to come back up when LMI comes back on the other interface That is the LMI state for one interface is dependent on the other Use this setting when backup is through the router instead of the unit It is not recommended since it makes fault isolation more difficult LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 3 Configures the LMI defined N2 parameter which sets the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link before
195. ls The source selected for this configuration option provides all of the timing within the unit and the clocks for all of the external interfaces The clock source will switch back to primary when the primary clock source returns and is stable for 10 seconds If the secondary clock source fails the clock source will switch to internal The clock source will switch back to primary when the primary clock source returns and is stable for 10 seconds NOTE For the Primary and Secondary Clock Source options only Internal can be selected for both options All other selections must have different settings e g if Primary Clock Source is set to Net1 Secondary Clock Source cannot be set to Net1 Net1 The secondary clock is derived from the Network1 T1 interface DSX The secondary clock is derived from the DSX T1 interface This setting only appears if the DSX 1 interface is installed and enabled see Configuring the DSX 1 Interface Internal The secondary clock is the internal clock 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 3 23 Configuration Configuring the Physical Interfaces Characteristics for the following physical interfaces can be configured Network Interface m User Data Port m DSX 1 Interface Physical Options Configuring the Network Interface When configuring the physical characteristics for the network interface select Physical from the Network menu see Table 3 4 Main Menu gt Configuration Netw
196. lue only appears for a user data port Initialize_From_Interface The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or DTE device Once a protocol has become active the protocol will be set to the protocol discovered Standard Annex A or Annex D on the frame relay link The protocol will not be updated after being initially discovered Frame relay links on user data ports discover the LMI protocol from an attached device via LMI status polls Frame relay links on the network interface discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached Network line and listening for correct poll response messages Auto_On_LMI_Fail The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or the DTE device whenever an LMI Link Down failure occurs This option is available for frame relay links on the Port and network interfaces Frame relay links on user data ports discover the LMI protocol from LMI status polls by attached DTE devices Frame relay links on the network interface discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached Network line and listening for correct poll response messages Standard Supports Standard LMI and the Stratacom enhancements to the Standard LMI Annex A Supports LMI as specified by Q 933 Annex A Annex D Supports LMI as specified by ANSI T1 6
197. m Check that the framing format for the DSX 1 DTE interface is correct Check that the DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 5 of 6 Troubleshooting Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do OOF at Network 1 An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on the network interface Incompatible framing format between the network and the FrameSaver unit Network cabling problem T1 facility problem Check that the framing format for the network interface is correct Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends Contact your network provider Primary Clock Failed A failure of the configured primary clock source for the unit was detected and the secondary clock is providing the timing for the unit This condition clears when the configured primary clock is restored Primary amp Secondary Clocks Failed A failure of both clock sources configured for the unit was detected This condition only applies to T1 network and DSX 1 interfaces It clears when the configured primary clock is restored Secondary Clock Failed A failure of the configured secondary clock source for the unit was detected and the internal clock is providing the timing for the unit The clock source will not automatically switch from internal until the pr
198. matic calls will not be initiated Traps sent to the modem are held until a dial in connection is established 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 3 61 Configuration 3 62 Table 3 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 4 of 4 Trap Disconnect Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the COM port connected modem disconnects after the SNMP trap message has been sent This configuration option only applies to modem connections initiated as a result of sending the SNMP trap message Enable Disconnects the call after sending an SNMP trap message s Disable Does not disconnect the call and holds the line until it is disconnected manually or by the remote modem This allows the NMS to poll the FrameSaver unit for more information after receiving an SNMP trap Call Retry Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether an incomplete call busy no answer etc is retried when an SNMP trap message is sent to the COM port connected external device If an Alternate Dial Out Directory is specified the alarm directory s telephone number is called first If the call cannot be completed then the alternate directory s telephone number is called see the Control menu s Modem Call Directories Enable Attempts to retry the call up to one time per SNMP trap message with a delay between the retry The delay is specified by the Dial Out
199. mation For the central site local management between the unit and the router must be set up as well see Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site Set up a local management PVC between the central site unit and its router for local management control by the end user customer B gt Procedure To set up management through the router 1 Create a DLCI that will be used for management on the user data port Configuration Data Ports DLCI Records 2 Create a Management PVC using the user data port DLCI just created Configuration Management and Communication Management PVC Minimally enter the following options Name for the management PVC Interface IP Address and Subnet Mask if different from the Node s Primary Link for this Management PVC the user data port Primary DLCI i e the data port DLCI 3 Save the configuration See Table 3 9 DLCI Record Options and Table 3 12 Management PVC Options for configuration information 3 14 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP Using the system s standard Routing Information Protocol RIP feature routing information is passed to the router over the management PVC so the router can learn routes to FrameSaver SLV devices Node IP information should be set up see Configuring Node IP Information B gt Procedure 1 Configure the router to recei
200. me ESF line performance statistics Performance Statistics ESF Line 5 26 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Service Level Verification Performance Statistics These statistics appear when Service Level Verification SLV is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Service Level Verification They only appear for the network interface and only if DLCls are multiplexed Table 5 11 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 1 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Far End Circuit Number of the multiplexed DLCI or VPI VCI Virtual Path Identifier Virtual Channel Identifier at the other end of the connection If the far end circuit is a DLCI the DLCI number 16 1007 appears If a VPI VCI the number is displayed as xx yyy xx being the VPI number 0 15 and yyy being the VCI number 32 2047 None appears if the unit has not communicated with the other end Far End IP Addr IP Address of the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection None appears if the FrameSaver unit has not communicated with the other end or if the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI does not have an IP Address configured Dropped SLV Responses The number of SLV inband sample messages sent for which a response from the far end device has not been received Inbound Dropped Frames Above CIR Within CIR
201. meSaver Devices Grouping Elements for Reports 9124 A2 LB20 00 Once the discovery process is completed and required changes are made the newly discovered elements DLCls should be organized into a group for Health reporting Grouping makes for easier monitoring and management of similar node types e g all SLV elements Once grouped you can then run reports on all DLCls in the network as well as reports on individual DLCls B gt Procedure To group elements 1 From the console select Edit Groups from the Reports menu The Add Groups dialog box opens Enter a name in the Group Name field Up to 64 characters can be entered A through Z a through z 0 through 9 dashes periods and underscores _ can be used No spaces can be included and the word All cannot be used Select the WAN radio button above the Available Elements list Highlight all the DLCls listed on the Available Elements list or select specific DLCls then select the left arrow button The highlighted DLCls move from the Available Elements list to the Group Members list Select the OK button when all appropriate DLCIs have been moved to the Group Members list The Add Groups dialog box closes and the newly created group appears on the Groups dialog box See Managing Groups and Group Lists in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional information That chapter also tells you how to customize reports March 2000 9 5 Setting Up Netw
202. n Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode Automatically Removing a Circuit Setting Up Management Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity at the Central Site Setting Up Back to Back Operation Changing Operating Mode Configuration Option Tables 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 3 1 Configuration 3 2 Configuring the Overall System Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System Configuring Service Level Verification Options Configuring General System Options Configuring the Physical Interfaces Configuring the Network Interface Configuring the User Data Port Configuring the DSX 1 Interface Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface Assigning DSX 1 Time Slots to the Network Interface Clearing Assignments Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface Manually Configuring DLC Records Configuring PVC Connections Setting Up Management and Communication Options Configuring Node IP Information Configuring Management PVCs Configuring General SNMP Management Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Configuring the Communication Port Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem March 2000 9124 A2 LB20
203. n and creating a new one Deleting a Login gt Procedure To delete a login record 1 Select Administer Logins Main Menu gt Control gt Administer Logins 2 Page through login pages records using the PgUp or PgDn function keys until the login to be deleted is displayed 3 Select Delete 4 Save your deletion When the deletion is complete the number of login pages records reflects one less record and the record before the deleted record reappears Example Page 2 of 4 is changed to Page 2 of 3 4 12 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance This chapter includes the following information 9124 A2 LB20 00 Displaying System Information Viewing LEDs and Control Leads LED Descriptions Control Lead Descriptions Device Messages Status Information System and Test Status Messages which includes Self Test Results Messages Health and Status Messages Test Status Messages Network LMI Reported DLCls Status PVC Connection Status Time Slot Assignment Status which includes Displaying Network Time Slot Assignments Displaying DSX 1 Time Slot Assignments Performance Statistics Clearing Performance Statistics Service Level Verification Performance Statistics DLCI Performance Statistics Frame Relay Performance Statistics ESF Line Performance Statistics March 2000 5 1 Operation and Maintenance FTP File Transfers Upgrading System Sof
204. n of the committed rate measurement interval Tc and excess burst size Be when a DLCI s CIR changes Excess burst size Be and committed burst size Bc are recalculated when Committed Burst Size Bc Bits is set to CIR The committed rate measurement interval Tc is recalculated when Committed Burst Size Bc Bits is set to Other March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 About the FrameSaver SLV 9124 RMON Based User History Statistics Gathering Provides everything needed to monitor network service levels plus throughput with accurate data delivery network latency and LMI and PVC availability In addition port bursting statistics are kept for all frame relay links These statistics are available real time via the Enterprise MIB and historically as an RMON2 User History object In future releases of the OpenLane SLM system this will enable even more accurate calculations of utilization Network User History Synchronization Allows correlation of RMON2 User History statistics among all SLV devices in a network for more accurate OpenLane SLV reports Using a central clock called the network reference time all SLV device user history statistics are synchronized across the network further enhancing the accuracy of OpenLane SLV reports Extensive Testing Capability Provides a variety of tests to identify and diagnose device network and other problems These tests can be commanded from the unit s menu driven user interf
205. n the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with forward explicit congestion notifications The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN indicator 5 30 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Frame Relay Performance Statistics The following statistics appear when Frame Relay is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Frame Relay All counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 282 2 then the count starts over The NextLink and PrevLink function keys only appear when multiple frame relay links have been configured Table 5 13 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 1 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay Link Frames Sent The number of frames sent over the interface Frames Received The number of frames received over the interface Characters Sent The number of data octets bytes sent over the interface Characters Received The number of data octets bytes received over the interface FECNs Received The number of foreward explicit congestion notifications received over the interface The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN indicator BECNs Received The number of backward explicit congestion notifications received over the inte
206. nades 4 8 Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels 4 9 Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses 4 10 Grealngra LOG nihcesuwcoonhing na arene Renae 4 11 MoOdiVind a login intscdiectitvtdsctemiceekiccamededeededhactesend 4 12 DeLa LOJN aripicerd dda dadeoidenesdeiiddnasaceteseududeme 4 12 5 Operation and Maintenance 9124 A2 LB20 00 Displaying System Information 000 c eee ee eens 5 2 Viewing LEDs and Control Leads 0000cc cece eee eee eee 5 3 LED DESChPUONS Jotpesaucam Sis aae eased a a a oe 5 4 Gonttol Lead DESCNpHIONS lt s cccc choca donaaaawdieteniae Saud anit 5 6 Device MGSSAGGS sincere ceeg eee wiped ered were elves eee edceee ce 5 7 Status Informat ON 21 0ovs eden aa cam steam ie mawore ne 5 12 System and Test Status Messages 00 cece eee eae 5 13 Network LMl Reported DLCls Status 000000000 5 19 PYG Connection Stalis diiccccka wich da o aeahae dene saawed bana 5 21 Time Slot Assignment Status 20 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 5 23 PEMONNANCe SlAUSICS 4500s dccune oes eeeeiebecsrieciasaoreaeeer 5 25 Clearing Performance Statistics 0000 e eee eee eee 5 26 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 5 27 DLCI Performance Statistics 00 cece eee eee eee 5 29 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 02 0 e sees 5 31 ESF Line Performance Statistics wc c cccsadse cewasdaaecagmads 5
207. nager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII text entry Adds to or changes Community Name 2 maximum 255 characters Clear Clears Community Name 2 Name 2 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 2 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP get and set commands 3 54 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support 9124 A2 LB20 00 Telnet and FTP options control whether a Telnet or FTP File Transport Protocol session is allowed through an interconnected IP network and the access security applicable to the session Two Telnet sessions can be active at a time see Table 3 14 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Session When a TS Management Link has been set up and activated the following options have no effect upon the PVC m Telnet Login Required m Session Access Level m FTP Login Required Table 3 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options 1 of 3 Telnet Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whethe
208. nal IP network through the frame relay network Node IP Address Uses the IP address contained in the Node IP Address see Table 3 11 Node IP Options Special 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Allows you to display edit an IP address for the unit s management PVC when the IP address for this interface is different from the node s IP address March 2000 3 51 Configuration 3 52 Table 3 12 Management PVC Options 2 of 3 Intf Subnet Mask Possible Settings Node Subnet Mask Calculate Special nnn nnn nnn nnn Default Setting Node Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit when the management PVC is providing connectivity to an external IP network through frame relay that requires a specific subnet mask for the interface Node Subnet Mask Uses the Interface IP Subnet contained in the Node Subnet Mask configuration option see Table 3 11 Node IP Options Calculate Calculates the subnet mask created by the IP protocol based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Cannot be displayed or edited Special 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Allows you to edit display the subnet mask for the management PVC when the subnet mask is different for this interface A text field displays where you can enter the subnet mask for this unit s management PVC Set DE Possible Settings Enab
209. ne end of the circuit the other end can send and monitor pattern tests The example below shows a PVC Test screen for a FrameSaver unit with the multiplexed DLC 550 selected If a standard DLCI was selected Disruptive rather than Non Disruptive would be displayed after Test Also the Connectivity test would not appear PVC Tests Screen Example main test network_pvc 9124 II Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 NETWORK PVC TESTS DLCI Number 550 Test Non Disruptive Command Status Result PVC Loopback Start Inactive 0 00 00 Send Pattern Start Inactive 0 00 00 Monitor Pattern Start Inactive 0 00 00 Sequence Errors 99999 Data Errors 99999 Connectivity Inactive RndTrip Time ms 99999 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit NOTE Errors encountered during these tests may be caused by mismatched CIRs in the two FrameSaver units If errors are detected verify the CIR configuration and retest March 2000 6 19 Troubleshooting PVC Loopback Send Pattern 6 20 The PVC Loopback loops frames back to the selected interface on a per PVC basis This test logically not physically loops back frames received from another FrameSaver device through the selected frame relay PVC to the same device Main Menu gt Test Network PVC Tests PVC Loopback Network PVC Loopback DTE gt __ _ PVC x Bose ih Soe se gt Network PVC x 98 16186
210. new alarms and creating history files A template of alarms and values for configuring alarms and several templates for creating history files specific to the FrameSaver unit are available OpenLane paradyne directories include the following Properties paradyne fsd file found in O penLane netscout alarms directory Properties paradyne fst file found in OQpenLane netscout alarms directory Alarms slvtemplate fct file found in OpenLane netscout alarms directory User history pd udh files found in O penLane net scout userHistory directory These files should be moved to NSHOME usr So they can be used See Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template and Creating History Files for additional information 8 2 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Configuring NetScout Manager Plus 9124 A2 LB20 00 For the NetScout Manager Plus main window to appear make sure your environment is set up exactly as specified in your NetScout Readme file You need to Copy the OpenLane directory to a user directory Add frame relay agents to the NetScout Manager Configure agent properties Verify and correct domains and groups Monitor the agent and DLCls Refer to the NetScout documentation for additional information about accessing and managing the FrameSaver SLV unit through NetScout Manager Plus refer to the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide to help you install the application monit
211. nfiguration Manager main window to apply your changes Refer to Editing Alarms in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide to change alarm thresholds 8 10 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding SLV Alarms Manually 9124 A2 LB20 00 Once DLCls have been discovered SLV alarms should be defined and assigned to each DLCI When configuring alarms manually every alarm must be configured for each DLC that is if there are eight alarms and 20 DLCls 160 trap configurations must be created 8 x 20 For this reason it is recommended that the OpenLane defaults be used Follow the procedure below to configure alarms manually To load OpenLane default settings for alarms see Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template B gt Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window 2 Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area in the upper right of the window then Property down the center of the screen The Custom Property Editor window opens see the window in Editing Alarms 3 Select a DLCI from the Trap list and select the Add button to the right of the list The Add Trap window opens i aies iiia tim Aig amp Riain Teinn Flom irii Fal ling Teeshiki besier March 2000 8 11 S
212. nfigured DLCls have been connected Configure more network and or Port 1 DLCls and try again No DLCls Defined DLCI Records was selected from an interface s Configuration Edit Display menu and no DLCl Records have been created for this interface Select New and create a DLCI record No more DLCls allowed New or CopyFrom was selected from an interface s DLCI Records configuration screen and the maximum number of DLC Records had already been reached Delete a DLCI then create the new DLCI Record March 2000 5 9 Table 5 5 Device Messages 4 of 5 Operation and Maintenance Message What It Indicates What To Do No Primary Destination Link DLCls Available New or Modify was selected from the PVC Connection Table but even though DLCls are available to form a connection no DLCls are available on the network link which is a suitable Primary PVC Destination Configure additional DLCls for the network link and try again If a network DLCI has been entered as a Source DLCI 1 Change the Source DLCI to a user data port DLCI 2 Enter the network DLCI as the PVC s Primary Destination No Security Records to Delete Delete was selected from the Administer Login screen and no security records had been defined No action needed Enter a security record Password Matching Error Re enter Password Password entered in the Re enter
213. ng management link the link is identified in the status field at the bottom of the Management PVC Entry screen with the This PVC has been designated as the TS Management Link message NOTE The unit may come from the factory with a TS Management PVC already set up e g 980 3 48 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Table 3 11 Node IP Options 1 of 2 Node IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the node Since an IP address is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node IP address with zeros Node Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the node Since the subnet mask is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node subnet mask with zeros When the node s subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255
214. ng the unit via a Telnet or FTP session when the service provider is using the TS Management Link Display Conditions This option does not appear when TS Management Link is set to None NOTES Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are not affected by the access level set by the Session Access Level Login Required or FTP Login Required option settings see Table 3 14 Telnet and FTP Sessions Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are affected by the Telnet Session Inactivity Timeout Disconnect Time and FTP Session option settings Level 1 Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed Use this setting when downloading files Level 2 Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information and run tests only they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information only they cannot change configuration options or run tests 3 50 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Configuring Management PVCs 9124 A2 LB20 00 Select Management PVCs to define inband management links by adding or changing Management PVCs see Table 3 12 First DLCI records must have been configured for the interface where the Management PVC will reside See Manuall
215. ng will only occur on DSOs that are cross connected to another T1 interface All other DSOs remain unaffected by trunk conditioning Enter one of the values shown in Table 3 7 in each of the fields on both the Network side and the DSX 1 side Although you can choose any value for the DSX 1 side the default value displayed is based on a typical setting that would be used with the corresponding Network side value Typical pairs of values are shown in the table below If you change the Network side value the DSX side value is changed to the corresponding default value Table 3 7 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values 1 of 3 Network Side Meaning DSX 1 Side None No signaling used on this DSO Use this setting if None there is no voice signaling information being passed on this DSO clear channel RBS default Robbed Bit Signaling is used on this DSO but no RBS trunk conditioning Signaling bits will be passed to the T1 interface to which this DSO is cross connected when this T1 interface is not in CGA but the signaling bits will be all ones when CGA is present The following values configure the cross connect for RBS as well as perform the trunk conditioning Although ABCD signaling bits for each setting are described only AB bits are transmitted when the cross connected T1 network interface is using D4 framing March 2000 3 37 Configuration Table 3 7 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values 2 of
216. nn indicates a DLC number of 16 through 1007 2 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 3 of 6 Troubleshooting Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do LMI Down The Local Management For the network interface frame relay link Interface is down for the specified frame relay link f LMI was never up verify Verify that Frame Relay If all of the above have been verified and the physical link is not in Alarm contact your network provider that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used If LMI was never up Verify that the proper time slots have been configured Verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used Performance Statistics show LMI frames being transmitted For user data port Check that the DTE cable is securely attached at both ends Verify that Transmit Clock Source and Invert Transmit Clock options are properly configured Verify that Frame Relay Performance Statistics show LMI frames being received If no frames are being received Check the attached device Verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used 2 frame relay link is one of the following
217. nt PVC e g the PVC between the router and the FrameSaver unit s user data port must be configured manually it cannot be configured automatically see Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site The following will occur when a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is selected Discovery Mode Configuration Description 1MPort Auto configuration is enabled on Port 1 default A management DLCI is configured A multiplexed network DLCI containing two embedded DLCls EDLCIls is configured for Port 1 user data and management data A PVC connection is configured between the network and port DLCls 1Port Auto configuration is enabled on Port 1 No management DLCI is configured A multiplexed network DLCI is configured for Port 1 user data A PVC connection is configured between the network and port DLCls NetOnly Auto configuration of a network DLCI only no Port 1 or PVC connections are configured No Port 1 PVC connection or management DLCI is configured Disable No frame relay discovery or automatic configuration takes place The FrameSaver unit will be configured manually 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 3 11 Configuration 3 12 NOTE If 1MPort the default is not the setting required for your application change the Frame Relay Discovery Mode before connecting the network cable or editing discovered option settings Otherwise the FrameSaver unit will start discovering
218. ntable ASCII characters Number of characters Up to 10 characters can be entered in the Login ID and Password fields Case sensitive Yes An asterisk appears in the password field for each character entered March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 User Interface and Basic Operation If your login was Then the Valid Main Menu appears see page 2 4 Begin your session Invalid Message Invalid Password appears on line 24 and the Login screen is redisplayed After three unsuccessful attempts A Telnet session is closed The User Interface Idle screen appears for a directly connected terminal An SNMP trap is generated Access is denied See your system administrator to verify your login Login ID Password combination If two sessions are already active wait and try again f attempting to access the unit through Telnet the local Telnet client process returns aConnection refused message at the bottom of the screen f attempting to access the unit over the COM port or modem port not via Telnet the User Interface Already In Use screen is redisplayed The type of connection Telnet Connection Direct COM Port Connection or Direct Modem Port Connection for each current user is identified along with the user s login ID B gt Procedure To end the session 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the function keys area of the screen 2 Type e Exit and press Enter For
219. ny IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted 6 26 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Troubleshooting Send Line Loopback The remote Line Loopback LLB up and down codes are in band codes that allow control of a remote device The LLB Up code invokes a line loopback in the remote unit while the LLB Down code terminates the remote line loopback Network loopbacks are defined in AT amp T TR 62411 Main Menu gt Test gt Network Physical Tests Send Line Loopback A remote LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active m Any Loopback on the same interface m Send FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on the synchronous data port Data Channel Loopback on the frame relay link on this network interface B gt Procedure To start and stop a Remote Line Loopback 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests 2 Select the code Up or Down in the Send Line Loopback field Up Puts a remote device in loopback Down Takes the remote device out of loopback 3 Highlight Send and press Enter to start the test The code is sent for 10 seconds 4 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 6 27 Troubleshooting Data Channel Loopbacks on a Frame Relay Link 6 28 A network initiated Data Channel Loopback DCLB that loops data over the frame relay link DSOs received on the netwo
220. od If SLV Packet Size is changed a new average is not available until a new sample has been received Unknown appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 minutes has not been successful Max RdTrip Latency Same as average Avg RdTrip Latency but storing the maximum value of latency over the previous 15 minute interval Unknown appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 minutes has not been successful 5 28 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance The statistics collected by the unit depend upon the device at the far end of the connection If the far end device is a FrameSaver SLV unit frame relay latency and FDR DDR performance statistics are collected If the far end device is a non FrameSaver device or a FrameSaver 9120 or 9620 only frame relay statistics are collected DLCI Performance Statistics These statistics appear when DLCI is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics DLC Table 5 12 DLCI Performance Statistics 1 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates DLCI Up Since 1 Date and time that the DLCI was last declared Active after a period of inactivity Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive If the DLCI was Down this is the time that the DLCI recovered If the DLCI was never Down this is the first time the unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the n
221. ode to the specified directory dir directory Print a listing of the directory contents in the specified directory If no directory is specified the current one is used get file file2 Copy a file from the remote directory of the FrameSaver node to the local directory on the host for configuration files only remotehelp command Print the meaning of the command If no argument is given a list of all Known commands is printed Is directory Print an abbreviated list of the specified directory s contents If no directory is specified the current one is used put file1 file2 Copy file from a local directory on the host to file 2 in the current directory of the FrameSaver node If file2 is not specified the file will be named file on the FrameSaver node recv file1 file 2 Same as a get send file1 file 2 Same as a put pwd Print the name of the current directory of the FrameSaver unit node bin Places the FTP session in binary transfer mode March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Upgrading System Software If you need to upgrade the FrameSaver unit s program code you must transfer the upgrade of the nam ocd file in the system memory directory using the put command NOTE Upgrades can be performed through the network using a Management PVC or through the COM port if Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 3 17 Communication
222. odem can be attached to the COM port for dialing out when an SNMP trap is generated To set up an external modem you need to 1 Set up SNMP trap managers 2 Setup an external modem 3 Set up Modem Directory phone numbers 4 Configure trap dial out See Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options to set up SNMP trap managers See Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out when trap dial out is desired See Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out for trap and alarm information Setting Up an External Modem for Trap Dial Out When trap dial out is desired the PC or asynchronous terminal must be disconnected from the unit s COM port when setup is complete and an external modem connected instead See Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem for additional information Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out B gt Procedure 1 Setup directory phone numbers Main Menu gt Control Modem Call Directories 2 Select Directory Number A for Alarm 3 Enter the phone number s Valid characters include For ASCII text Entering the phone number Space Readability characters underscore _ and dash Comma Readability character for a 2 second pause B Blind dialing P Pulse dialing unless B is specified T Tone dialing unless B is specified W Wait for dial tone 4 Save the phone number s 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 3 9 Configuration S
223. omers This report is used to provide service level information to service customers to help them determine optimum service levels needed based upon their own traffic data as well as provide documented evidence for increasing CIR It combines daily volume daily Health exceptions bandwidth distribution average Health Index ratings and availability for each DLCI onto a single page At a Glance Reports Provides consolidated DLCI and network performance information onto a single page At a Glance Report Consolidates bandwidth utilization network traffic events occurring over the reporting period and availability and latency levels information Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report e g burst octets but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports Supplemental Reports and Health reports Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCls having a high Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a DLCI s poor Health Index rating FrameSaver SLV Plus At a Glance Report Performs trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for DLCls see page 9 9 for an example This is the first Network Health report to integrate the FrameSaver SLV s unique monitoring capabilities using the unit s SLV enhanced network statistics 9 8 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Setting Up Network Health fo
224. on General March 2000 3 17 Configuration Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System Select Frame Relay and LMI from the System menu to display or change the Frame Relay and LMI options for the entire system see Table 3 1 Main Menu gt Configuration System Frame Relay and LMI See Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface to set an interface s frame relay options Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 1 of 2 LMI Behavior Possible Settings Independent Port 1_Follows_Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 1 Port 1_Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 Default Setting Independent Configures the device to allow the state of the LMI to be passed from one interface to another determining how the unit will handle a change in the LMI state Sometimes referred to as LMI pass through Independent Handles the LMI state of each interface separately so that the LMI state of one interface has no effect on the LMI state of another interface Provides LMI Spoofing This is the recommended setting when backup is configured and for Network Service Providers NSPs Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 1 Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on Port 1 goes down disabling the network interface and deasserting its control leads When LMI on Port 1 comes back up the network interface is reenabled The LMI state on the network interface has no effect on the LMI state on Port 1 That is the network interface s LMI fol
225. or change the communication port configuration options see Table 3 17 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Communication Port Table 3 17 Communication Port Options 1 of 4 Port Use Possible Settings Terminal Net Link Default Setting Terminal Assigns a specific use to the COM port NOTE Ifthe Default IP Destination is set to COM see Table 3 11 Node IP Options and you change Port Use to Terminal the Default IP Destination is forced to None Terminal The COM port is used for the asynchronous terminal connection Net Link The COM port is the network communications link to the IP network or IP device port Data Rate Kbps Possible Settings 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 115 2 Default Setting 19 2 Specifies the rate for the COM port in kilobits per second 9 6 115 2 kbps Sets the communication port speed Character Length Possible Settings 7 8 Default Setting 8 Specifies the number of bits needed to represent one character NOTE Character length defaults to 8 and cannot be changed if Port Use is set to Net Link 7 Sets the character length to seven bits 8 Sets the character length to eight bits Use this setting if using the COM port as the network communication link Parity Possible Settings None Even Odd Default Setting None Provides a method of checking the accuracy of binary numbers for the CO
226. or rate falls below the threshold value which may take up to 15 minutes Verify that the network cable is securely attached at the network interface Contact your network provider CTS down to Port 1 Device The CTS control lead on the device s interface is off Check DTR and RTS from Port 1 Verify that the port is enabled Check DTR from the user data port March 2000 6 7 Troubleshooting 6 8 Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 2 of 6 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do DLCI nnnn Down frame relay link 1 2 The DLCI for the specified frame relay link is down Verify that the network LMI is up If it is contact your network service provider DTR Down from Port 1 Device The DTR control lead on the device connected to the specified port is off This message applies to data ports that act as DCEs Examine the attached DTE and cable connected to the system s port Check that the port cable is securely attached at both ends Check the status of the attached equipment Link Down Administratively frame relay link The specified frame relay link has been disabled by the unit due to LMI Behavior conditions or LMI Protocol on another link is in a failed state This is not an alarm condition so System Operational appears as well Verify that the network LMI is up If it is contact your network provider 1 nn
227. or traffic and diagnose emerging problems on network segments NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide to help you configure agents remote servers and report templates using the various NetScout products NetScout Probe User Guide to help you install the NetScout Probe between the FrameSaver unit and its router and configure the probe on network segments you want to monitor March 2000 8 3 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network gt Procedure ls 2 Bring up the NetScout Manager Plus main window Select the FrameRelay radio button from the agent type selection bar on the left side of the window File v Agent w AgentGroup w Switch FrameRelay A list of configured frame relay agents appear in the list box below the Name and IP Address headings If this is a new NetScout Manager Plus installation the list box below the selection bar is blank since no agents are configured yet Select the Admin radio button from the application selection bar to the far right of the screen Applicable configuration and administration icons appear in the box below the application bar Help wv Application Admin Click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window Select the Add button down the center of the screen Minimally enter the following Agent name IP address Propert
228. ork Physical Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options 1 of 4 Line Framing Format Possible Settings D4 ESF Default Setting ESF Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the T1 network interface D4 Uses D4 framing format NOTE This setting is not recommended by network carriers False yellow alarms may occur after traffic has been running and the channel returns to idle or when there is light traffic when other settings are selected ESF format does not create this problem ESF Uses Extended Superframe framing format Line Coding Format Possible Settings AMI B8ZS Default Setting B8ZS Specifies the line coding format for the network interface AMI Uses Alternate Mark Inversion AMI line coding format B8ZS Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS line coding format Line Build Out LBO Possible Settings 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Default Setting 0 0 Specifies the line build out for the signal transmitted to the network 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Specifies line build out in dB 3 24 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options 2 of 4 Bit Stuffing Possible Settings 62411 Disable Default Setting 62411 Determines the type of bit insertion to provide ones density requirements for data transmitted to the network Display Conditions This option does not appear w
229. ork Health for FrameSaver Devices Generating Reports for a Group Once Network Health has had sufficient time to gather data from the polled DLCls and the DLCls have been grouped you can start generating reports When selecting a report Section select WAN from the drop down list See Running Reports from the Console in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional information That section also tells you how to schedule automatic report generation NOTE Network Health provides information with each chart or table generally referred to as a report Click on the hyperlink Explanation of for an explanation of the report and its features You can also refer to the Network Health Reports Guide About Service Level Reports For long term analysis and reporting you will want to license the Service Level Reports application This application analyzes data collected over months or by quarters and provides service level information about an enterprise a region department or business process Executive IT Manager and Customer Service Level reports are provided Using these reports you can measure service performance against goals and agreements Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables availability bandwidth bytes health exceptions and latency These ranges need to be set before reports are scheduled About At a Glance Reports At a Glance Reports consolidate various important DLC and network p
230. ort Service Side of the Frame Relay UNI Supported by the media specific Frame Relay Services MIB iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib m linkDown LMI is down for the LMI Protocol configured or Frame Relay link is disabled ifString LMI down No alarms exist on the link e g Sync Data Port SO1P1 frame relay link Port 1 LMI down ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp LMI is up or Frame Relay link is enabled String ifString up Network DTE Side of the Frame Relay UNI Supported by the media specific Frame Relay DTE s MIB iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib linkDown LMI is down for the LMI Protocol configured 3 or Frame Relay link is disabled Strings ifString LMI down ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp LMI is up or Frame Relay link is enabled String ifString up 3 If the LMI Protocol is not configured a linkUp linkDown trap is based solely upon whether the interface is enabled or disabled March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Traps enterprise Specific SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults These traps indicate that an enterprise
231. ory table is located in NSHOME bin CAUTION Do not use user_history_table_1 or 2 UserHistory1 and UserHistory2 are the default user history files used to keep SLV data for reports Editing either of these files will destroy SLV reporting capability B gt Procedure 1 Type dvuhist f agentname user_history_table_number config number_of_buckets interval download_file udh to load user defined history files for the frame relay link Example dvuhist f Dallas51 3 config 30 60 Dallas51lk udh The interval must be entered in seconds Type dvuhist f agentname DLCI_number user_history_table_number config number_of_buckets interval download_file udh to load user defined history files for a specific DLCI Example dvuhist f Dallas51 301 3 config 30 60 Dallas301 udh The same user history table number can be used for both the link and DLCI For these examples user history table number 3 will appear as UserHistory3 on the History List See Step 5 in Monitoring a DLCI s History Data to verify that the user defined history files have been loaded Refer to Installing UDH Files in Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information March 2000 8 15 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Monitoring a DLCI s History Data Once the monitoring variables have been defined a problem DLCI can monitored B gt Procedure To monitor user history data 1 From t
232. ot Housing 9001 F 1 020 NMS Products OpenLane Enterprise 7805 D1 001 OpenLane Workgroup 7805 D 1 003 NetScout Manager Plus For UNIX or Windows NT 9180 NetScout Server For UNIX or Windows NT 9190 NetScout WebCast For UNIX or Windows NT 9155 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 Equipment List Model Feature Description Number Optional Features Wall Mounting Kit for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F 1 891 Shelf Mounting Kit for 1 Slot Housings 9001 F 1 894 Cables This table lists cables you can order Description Part Number Feature Number RJ48C T1 Network Cable 035 0209 2031 3100 F 1 500 unkeyed RJ48C to unkeyed RJ48C RJ49C 20 feet 6 1 meters For use in the U S T1 Line Interface Cable 035 0221 2031 3100 F1 510 RJ48C to CA81A 20 feet 6 1 meters For use in Canada RJ48C T1 Network Cable 035 0381 2031 unkeyed RJ48C to keyed RJ48C RJ49C 20 feet 6 1 meters For use in Japan Standard EIA 232 Straight Through Cable 035 0313 1431 3100 F2 550 D Sub9 to DB25 for PC serial port 14 feet 4 3 meters COM Port to LAN Adapter Cable 035 0315 1431 3100 F 1 910 custom unkeyed 8 pin plug to 8 pin plug modular cable 14 feet 4 3 meters Used for a LAN Adapter LANA Adapter DB25 plug to 8 position modular 002 0069 0031 3100 F 1 920 receptacle Used with the COM Port to LAN Adapter Cable Standard ElA 232 D Crossover Cable 0
233. ots m DSX 1 time slots to the network interface time slots You can also clear cross connection assignments for the system or for a selected slot or interface NOTE Although it is not required it is suggested that you progress through each screen in order from top to bottom Use the following procedures to assign cross connections Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface Before assigning network time slots for use by frame relay traffic configure the Network physical and Frame Relay options if needed then allow Time Slot Discovery to autodetect and assign the appropriate time slots to frame relay If there are multiple Frame Relay data links on the network interface or if Time Slot Discovery is not currently active you can manually assign time slots on the network interface for frame relay traffic using the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen This screen is read only when Time Slot Discovery is set to Enable for the network interface 3 32 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Frame Relay Network Time Slot Assignment Screen Example main config tslot_assign frame_relay 9124 Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 FRAME RELAY NETWORK 1 ASSIGNMENT Time Slot Discovery Disable NO01 N02 N03 N04 NOS NO6 NO7 NO08 Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available N09 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 Available Available FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRlyl FrameRly1 FrameRly1 F
234. peration and Maintenance 5 36 The following performance statistics are collected for ESF line conditions Statistic What It Indicates Errored Seconds ES Any second with one or more ESF Error events Unavailable Seconds UAS Any second in which service is unavailable Begins incrementing at the onset of 10 consecutive seconds of severely errored seconds SES and stops incrementing after 10 consecutive seconds of no SESs Severely Errored Seconds SES Any second with 320 or more CRC errors or one or more Out Of Frame OOF events Bursty Errored Seconds BES Any second with more than one but less than 320 CRC errors Controlled Slip Seconds CSS Any second with one or more controlled slips a replication or deletion of a DS1 frame by the receiving device This is collected for network performance statistics only Loss of Frame Count LOFC The number of Loss of Frame conditions Worst Interval The largest number of seconds for either ES UAS SES BES or CSS or the greatest Loss of Frame Count LOFC If more than one interval contains the same worst value then the oldest interval is displayed March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance FTP File Transfers 9124 A2 LB20 00 The FrameSaver unit supports a standard File Transfer Protocol FTP server over Transmission Control Protocol TCP A complete binary image of the configuration fil
235. ppears 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 3 15 Configuration 5 Selectthe Delete EDLCI Connections and Make a Mgmt Only PVC option PVC connections for the selected DLCI are broken the Port 1 DLCI mapped to this network DLCI and the embedded management DLCI EDLCI are deleted and the selected DLCI will be reconfigured as a management PVC using the Node IP Address See Table 3 9 DLC Record Options for configuration information Setting Up Back to Back Operation Using this special feature you can set up two FrameSaver units that are connected back to back without frame relay switches between them as ina test bench setup Changing Operating Mode When setting up back to back operation One unit must be configured for Standard operation which is the setting for normal operation The other unit must be configured for Back to Back operation so it presents the network side of the UNI user network interface Only one of the units will have its operating mode changed B gt Procedure To set up back to back operation 1 On the unit to be configured for Back to Back operation manually configure DLCls DLCls should be configured before connecting the two units 2 Access the Change Operating Mode screen Main Menu gt Control gt Change Operating Mode 3 Select Back to Back Operation and respond Yes to the Are you sure prompt 4 Save the change gt Procedure To return the unit to normal operation 1 R
236. ps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 Alarm OID Cross Reference 1 of 2 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 18 9 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 18 9 1 5 1 Unavailable Seconds MIB DS1 E1 MIB RFC 1406 Tag dsx1TotalUASs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx FECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx BECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Frames Sent MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx CIR Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx DLCI Link Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Frames Received MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Rx DLCI Link Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 D Tx Frames Exceeding CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Frames Dropped by Network MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag frFrExtDiciNetDropFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 23 1 D Missing Latency Responses MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciMissedS
237. ptom Possible Cause Solutions No receipt or transmission of data Cross Connection of the DLCls are configured incorrectly Verify the PVC connections and DLCls by checking the network discovered DLCls on the LMI Reported DLCls screen DLCI is inactive on the frame relay network m Verify that the DLCI s is active on the LMI Reported DLCls screen If the DLCI s is not active contact the service provider Verify the LMI Reported DLCI field on the Interface Status screen DTE is configured incorrectly Check the DTE s configuration LMI is not configured properly for the DTE or network Configure LMI characteristics to match those of the DTE or network LMI link is inactive Verify that the LMI link is active on the network the Status Msg Received counter on the Network Frame Relay Performance Statistics screen increments Losing Data Frame relay network is experiencing problems Run PVC Loopback and Pattern tests to isolate the problem then contact the service provider Out of Sync If Monitor Pattern was selected it means the test pattern generator and receiver have not yet synchronized CIR settings for the units at each end are mismatched If the message persists it means that 5 packets out of 25 are missing or are out of sequence Verify that the unit at the other end is configured to Send Pattern Correct unit configurations
238. r FrameSaver Devices Paradyne Frame Saver SLV Plus At a Glance Report WA Biren Larga Phd canke die 10905 Latency Marimon Arraga maac RRETESERE Pas iaee I Preia E Bean ange Fiara ni haraa iat Demi ange O as Rara amp T Horiak Fiara Depa Eii Se fps lt i eyes B 0000 bee a Ebby O 00 yin Lind Lip Tima 7 DUCI Up Tirsa h a a a a a a rr a ee ee ee FP P y A P F an an a a a ae LLL LF nip Ph pa Pan A EE I a P Ea mirom ee Pii Cred 1D HIT PH Trend Reports Perform trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for DLCls Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report e g burst octets but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports Supplemental Reports and Health reports Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCls having a high Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a DLCl s poor Health Index rating See the Network Health Reports Guide for more information about these reports 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 9 9 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices 9 10 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Menu Hierarchy Menus The following is a graphical representation of the FrameSaver SLV 9124 unit s menu organization 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 Menu Hierarchy A 2 Menu Hierarchy Status System and Test Stat
239. r the FrameSaver unit will respond to a session request from a Telnet client on an interconnected IP network Enable Allows Telnet sessions between the FrameSaver unit and Telnet client Disable Does not allow Telnet sessions Telnet Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a user ID and password referred to as the login are required to access the menu driven user interface via a Telnet session If required the login used is the same login used for an menu driven user interface session This option does not affect the TS Management Link Enable Requires a login to access a Telnet session Disable Does not require a login March 2000 3 55 Configuration Table 3 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options 2 of 3 Session Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest security level allowed when accessing the menu driven user interface via a Telnet session If a login is required for the session the effective access level is also determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option This option does not affect the TS Management Link NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the session or the user For example if the assigned Session Access Level is Level 2 but the User Ac
240. rameRly1 N17 N118 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save ClearAll DSXAssign Value Meaning Time Slot Specifies whether the time slots used for frame relay traffic should Discovery be discovered from the network interface upon detection of an LMI failure This option allows additional time slots to be added without manually reconfiguring the device Ntt This field represents time slot tt of the selected network interface Assigned The time slot is already assigned to something other than frame relay so it is unavailable Assigned time slots cannot be modified from this screen Available The time slot is currently unassigned FrameRly1 The time slot is assigned to frame relay service link 1 For easy movement between screens select the DSXAssign function key to go directly to the DSX 1 to Network Assignments screen Time Slot Assignment Rule Valid network time slots are either Available or contain a frame relay link 1 assignment 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 3 33 Configuration B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Time Slot Assignment gt Frame Relay Network Assignments The Frame Relay Network Assignments screen appears This screen contains a matrix of the current assignment status of
241. rch 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 7 enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 3 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterpriseSecondary devLastTrapString Operating software has detected ClockFail 4 devHealthAndStatus that the secondary clock source mib has failed String Secondary clock failed enterpriseSecondary Operating software has detected ClockFailClear 104 that the secondary clock source is operational again String Secondary clock restored enterpriseSelfTest Fail 2 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib Unit has completed re initialization and a hardware failure was detected String Self test failed s s is the contents of devSelfTestResult enterprise Test Start 5 enterprise Test Stop 105 For physical interfaces and frame relay links m iflndex RFC 1573 0 0 placeholder devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib For virtual circuits DLCls devFrExtDicilflndex devFrExt mib devFrExtDiciDlci devFrExt mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib At least one test has been started on an interface or virtual circuit String testString test started on ifString e g DTE Loopback test started on Sync Data Port S01P1 All tests have been halted on an interface or virtual
242. reate the management PVC Delete another management PVC and try again March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 Table 5 5 Device Messages 3 of 5 Operation and Maintenance Message What It Indicates What To Do Limit of PVC Connections reached New was selected from the PVC Connection Table and the maximum number of PVCs has already been created Do not create the PVC connection Delete another PVC connection and try again Name Must be Unique Name entered for a management PVC has been used previously Enter another 4 character name for the logical management link No Destination Link DLCls Available New was selected from the PVC Connection Table but even though DLCls are available to form a connection no DLCls are available on the network link which is a suitable PVC Destination Configure additional DLCls for the network link and try again No DLCls available for connection New was selected from the PVC Connection Table but all configured DLCls have been connected No action needed or configure more DLCls and try again No DLCls available for connection New was selected from the Management PVCs option screen but all Link DLCI pairs have been connected Configure more network and or Port 1 Links DLCls pairs and try again No DLCls Available for Mgmt PVC New was selected from the Management PVCs option screen but all co
243. red as a network communication link Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 3 17 Communication Port Options 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the COM port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 3 68 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Security and Logins 9124 A2 LB20 00 This chapter includes the following Limiting Access Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access Controlling External COM Port Device Access Controlling Telnet or FTP Access Limiting Telnet Access Limiting FTP Access Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link Controlling SNMP Access Disabling SNMP Access Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses Creating a Login Modifying a Login Deleting a Login March 2000 4 1 Security and Logins Limiting Access The FrameSaver unit provides access security on the following interfaces m Asynchronous async terminal Telnet m FTP SNMP Up to two direct or Telnet sessions can be active at any given time that is you can have two simultaneous Telnet sessions or one Telnet sess
244. relative priority for management traffic sent on management PVCs on this DLCI to the network Display Conditions This option is not available on a user data port Low Management data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Management data configured for the DLC has medium priority High Management data configured for the DLCI has high priority March 2000 3 45 Configuration Configuring PVC Connections 3 46 The Auto Configuration feature automatically configures PVC Connections and their DLCI Records PVC Connections can also be created manually see Table 3 10 Main Menu gt Configuration PVC Connections From this screen you can go directly to the Management PVC screen by selecting the MgmtPVCs function key for easy movement between screens Quick removal of unused DLCls included in an existing PVC Connection except for HQ Site is also available when the Delete function key is selected and you respond Yes to the Remove otherwise unused components associated with the deleted PVC prompt Table 3 10 PVC Connection Options 1 of 2 Source Link Possible Settings Port 1 Net1 FR1 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface that starts a PVC connection the from end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined that are not part of a PVC connec
245. ress the down arrow key to position the cursor on a menu selection or press the up arrow key to move the cursor to the bottom of the menu list Each menu selection is highlighted as you press the key to move the cursor from position to position 2 Press Enter The selected menu or screen appears B gt Procedure To return to a previous screen press the Escape Esc key until you reach the desired screen Switching Between Screen Areas Use Cirl a to switch between screen areas see the example on page 2 5 gt Procedure To switch to the function keys area 1 Press Ctrl a to switch from the screen area to the function keys area 2 Select either the function s designated underlined character or Tab to the desired function key 3 Press Enter The function is performed To return to the screen area press Ctrl a again March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Selecting a Field User Interface and Basic Operation Once you reach the desired menu or screen select a field to view or change or issue a command Press the Tab or right arrow key to move the cursor from one field to another The current setting or value appears to the right of the field Entering Information 9124 A2 LB20 00 You can enter information in one of three ways Select the field then Manually type in enter the field value or command Example Entering bjk as a user s Login ID on the Administer Logins screen from the Control menu branch
246. resses or Subnet Masks NOTE When auto configuration creates a multiplexed DLCI but a standard DLCI is needed change the DLCI to standard from the network DLC Records screen Configuration Network gt DLCI Records March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is changed and saved the Saving will cause Auto Configuration to update and Restart Are you sure prompt appears No is the default for this prompt If Yes y is entered the Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections prompt appears No is the default for this prompt If Yes is entered all multiplexed DLCls and PVC Connections are deleted except for Management PVCs with the user data port as the primary destination and the Management PVC that is designated as TS Management Link If No is entered previously discovered and auto configured option settings will not be removed but configuration updates due to LMI response messages are performed according to the just saved mode setting If No n is entered or if you exit the screen without responding to the prompt no Auto Configuration updates are performed and updates due to LMI response messages are performed according to the previously saved setting Automatically Removing a Circuit 9124 A2 LB20 00 Using the automatic circuit removal feature which comes enabled network DLCls and PVCs can be automatically removed from the unit s configuration when the the network service p
247. rface The network sends BECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator Frame Relay Errors Total Errors The number of total frame relay errors excluding LMI errors Short frames long frames invalid DLCls unknown DLCls and unknown errors are included in this total Indicates that there may be a non frame relay device on the other end of the link or the units at either the far end or both ends of the link may be configured incorrectly Invalid Rx Frames The number of invalid frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface There is a non frame relay device on the other end of the link 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 5 31 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 13 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 2 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay Errors cont d Short Rx Frames The number of frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface that were less than 5 octets five 8 bit bytes in length There may be a non frame relay device on the other end of the link Long Rx Frames The number of frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface that were more than 8192 octets in length The device on the far end of the link may be configured incorrectly Invalid DLCI The number of frames received over the interface that were addressed to DLCls outside the valid range that is a number less than 16 or gre
248. ribution statistics on the table or graph will be zero When a DLCI is selected the first and last size distribution statistics are ignored for FrameSaver units and the statistics for those buckets appear in the next valid bucket i e bucket size lt 64 and 64 statistics appear in the 65 127 bucket and gt 1518 statistics appear in the 1024 1518 bucket Conversations and Long Term and Short Term Histories are not supported in this release As a result no data will appear on windows that include these panes March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices FrameSaver units are compatible with Concord Communication s Network Health software In addition Network Health has released the first in a series of software modules that integrate FrameSaver SLV enhanced performance statistics into its reporting package see the FrameSaver SLV report example on page 9 9 To get this report you need Network Health R4 01 or higher This chapter includes Network Health information as it relates to FrameSaver SLV devices It includes the following 9124 A2 LB20 00 Installation and Setup of Network Health and reports Discovering FrameSaver Elements Configuring the Discovered Elements Grouping Elements for Reports Generating Reports for a Group About Service Level Reports About At a Glance Reports About Trend Reports Printed Reports Reports Applicable to SLV Devices March 20
249. rk interface through the FrameSaver unit s framing circuitry and back to the same interface A DCLB can be controlled over the frame relay link using one of the following in band methods m V 54 Loopback ANSI T1 403 Annex B Fractional T1 FT1 Channel Loopback The frame relay service provider can use DCLB to verify the integrity of the frame relay circuit lt lt Other T1 All Interface 1s The T1 DCLB Interface 98 16223 CAUTION V 54 and FT1 Loopbacks may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Troubleshooting Send Remote Line Loopback 9124 A2 LB20 00 The remote Line Loopback LLB up and down codes are in band codes that allow control of a remote device The LLB Up code invokes a line loopback in the remote unit while the LLB Down code terminates the remote line loopback Network loopbacks are defined in AT amp T TR 62411 A remote LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active Any Loopback on the same interface Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this interface Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous and assigned to this network interface Dat
250. rmines whether the FrameSaver unit can be managed as an SNMP agent by an SNMP compatible NMS Enable Can be managed as an SNMP agent Disable Cannot be managed as an SNMP agent The FrameSaver unit will not respond to SNMP messages nor send SNMP traps Community Name 1 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Public in ASCII text field Specifies the first of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the FrameSaver unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII text entry Adds to or changes Community Name 1 maximum 255 characters Clear Clears Community Name 1 Name 1 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Write Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 1 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP get and set commands Community Name 2 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the second of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the FrameSaver unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP ma
251. rovider no longer supports them Automatic deletion is based upon information from a LMI full status response on an active frame relay link When this feature is set to Enable The following will be automatically removed from the unit s configuration Unsupported network DLCls and PVC connections that include multiplexed network DLCls Unsupported standard network DLCls that are not configured as the primary destination in a management PVC Non management PVCs in which unsupported standard network DLCls are included DLCls not included in three consecutive LMI full status response messages LMI status responses that indicate a Deleted status for the DLCI All configured options relating to the deleted circuits are also deleted and they revert to their default settings A DLCI will not be deleted if the physical interface or frame relay link is down or if the DLCI is used for the TS Management Link Disable Unused network DLCls PVC connections and management PVCs must be manually removed March 2000 3 13 Configuration Setting Up Management FrameSaver units are already set up for SNMP management with Community Name 1 set to Public and Name 1 Access set to Read Write For remote sites other than the IP Address this is all that is required Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management See Table 3 13 General SNMP Management Options for configuration infor
252. rror Event Threshold 3 20 3 21 SNMP assigning community names access levels limiting access Management 3 54 4 8 NMS security options 3 Number of Managers setting up Trap Managers 3 58 Traps 3 59 downloading B 2 standards supported software changing 5 40 download downloading 5 37 revision NAM 5 2 Source DLCI EDLCI Link Spacebar Standard_out RIP standards compliance for SNMP Traps starting a session a test 9124 A2 LB20 00 Index statistics 1 3 5 25 elements selecting performance intervals for display uploading to an NMS Status DLCI Enquiry LMI 3 19 3 41 Health and information LED menu branch PVC connection test messages timeslot assignment 5 23 Stop Bits 3 64 stopping a test 6 17 Subnet Mask 3 52 3 65 Subnet Mask Node 3 49 suggestions user documentation A summary network report switching between screen areas to new software 5 40 System and test status messages configuring options 3 17 displaying information Frame Relay and LMI options 3 18 General options 3 22 messages Name Contact and Location setting the clock data amp time 3 8 T1 Canadian line interface cable LMI Heartbeat 3 19 3 41 network cable network interface options T2 LMI Inbound Heartbeat 3 19 3 42 T3 LMI N4 Measurement Period 3 19 3 42 Tab key Te 3 44
253. rs Cables and Pin Assignments C 10 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Technical Specifications Table D 1 FrameSaver SLV 9124 Technical Specifications 1 of 2 Specification Criteria Approvals FCC Part 15 FCC Part 68 Industry Canada Safety Class A digital device Refer to the equipment s label for the Registration Number Refer to the equipment s label for the Certification Number Refer to the equipments label for safety information Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Shock and vibration 32 F to 122 F 0 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C 5 to 85 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling Dissipation Power Consumption and 7 9 watts 60 Hz 3 0 135 A at 120 Vac 12 Result 27 Btu per hour Physical Dimensions Height Width Depth 2 9 inches 7 4 cm 8 5 inches 21 6 cm 12 5 inches 31 8 cm Weight 2 65 Ibs 1 2 kg 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 D 1 Technical Specifications D 2 Table D 1 FrameSaver SLV 9124 Technical Specifications 2 of 2 Specification Criteria COM Port 25 position DB25 connector Standard EIA 232 ITU V 24 ISO 2110 Data rates 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 and 115 2 kbps T1 Network Interface Data rates Services supported Physical interface USA Physical interface Canada Framing format Coding format Line Build
254. s 3 To add a FrameSaver SLV supported domain or correct property settings select the Edit button to the right of the Domain section of the Property Editor window The Edit Domain window opens Edit Gamain Ceol Part Lin 4 Click on the domain from the Domains list and configure the following Property Description Setting Groups Stats S Statistics collection Enabled for all domains Hosts H Level 3 information network Enabled for IP domain only Disabled for all other domains Conversations C Protocols being used Disabled for all domains Logging Event logging Disabled for all domains and groups 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to apply the changes Refer to Configuring Domains in Properties Files in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 8 7 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template Once DLCls have been discovered SLV alarms should be configured and assigned to each DLCI OpenLane provides a template for configuring alarms DLCI alarms can be configured manually but using the Paradyne alarm defaults template greatly reduces configuration time The following alarms are configured for each DLCI included in the Paradyne MIB Frames Sent SLVFramesSnt Rx D
255. s Telnet access conversation elements CRC creating a login 4 11 new PVC connections management links user history files cross connections crossover EIA 232 cable CTS control lead CTS down CTS down to Port Device 5 14 current software revision D Data Delivery Ratio DDR 1 2 Link Control Identifier DLCI 3 53 Port physical options 3 28 port connector pin assignments Rate Kbps 3 63 selection criteria uploading SLV and packet capture Data Channel Loopback Date amp Time setting DBM Health and Status messages test status messages DCLB DDR 1 2 DE Set Default IP Destination 3 49 Delete key deleting a login 4 12 Destination 3 60 Default IP DLCI EDLCI Link Device messages troubleshooting problems 6 13 9124 A2 LB20 00 Dial In Access Dial Out Delay Time Min 3 62 Directory options Trap Directory Alternate Dial Out disabling SNMP access Discard Eligible DE Disconnect Time Minutes 3 57 3 65 discovering elements DLCls Discovery frame relay FR Index DTE Loopback port connector pin assignments port initiated loopbacks DTLB DTR control lead down down from Port 1 Device Ignore Control Leads Frame Relay Mode saving a mode change displaying configuration options identity information LEDs and control leads DLCI 3 53 Destination on SLV meant 8 20 interface status
256. s The number of receiver errors on the interface The following are included in this count Receive invalid frames short frames long frames invalid DLCls unknown DLCls and unknown errors Rx Total Discards Receive errors non octet aligned frames frames with CRC errors and Rx Overruns Rx Total Discards The number of receiver discards on the interface The following are included in this count Resource errors Rx Overruns Frames received when the link was down a Inactive and disconnected DLCls Inactive destination DLCls m Unknown EDLCls Rx Overruns The number of receiver overruns too many bits on the interface Rx Non Octet Frames The number of non octet frames received on the interface Rx CRC Errors The number of received CRC cycle redundancy check errors Tx Total Errors The total number of transmit errors on the interface including transmits discards and transmit overruns Tx Total Discards The total number of transmit discards on the interface including underrun flushes Tx Underruns The number of transmitter underruns too few bits on the interface 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 5 33 Operation and Maintenance ESF Line Performance Statistics These statistics appear when ESF Line is selected from the Performance Statistics menu for the network interface Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics ESF Line Only seven T1 network statis
257. s and press Enter Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 or Default Factory Configuration The selected set of configuration options is loaded into the configuration edit area and the Configuration Edit Display menu appears This sequence of steps would be shown as the menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration March 2000 3 5 Configuration Changing Configuration Options B gt Procedure To change configuration option settings 1 From the Configuration Edit Display menu select a set of configuration options and press Enter For example Configuration PVC Connections 2 Select the configuration options that are applicable to your network and make appropriate changes to the setting s See Chapter 2 User nterface and Basic Operation for additional information When creating new PVC connections or management PVCs some configuration options will be blank For a valid setting to appear Tab to the configuration option and press the spacebar 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all changes are complete NOTE Only Security Access Level 1 users can change configuration options Security Access Level 2 users can only view configuration options and run tests Security Access Level 3 users can only view configuration options they cannot change configuration options or run tests 3 6 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Saving Configuration Options When
258. sical Tests DSX 1 Physical Tests 2 Select the desired pattern in the Send or Monitor field If sending monitoring a user defined pattern enter the the desired 2 byte hexadecimal value in the field next to Send or Monitor When sending a pattern the Inject ERR function key appears Use Inject ERR if you want to inject a bit error in the transmitted bit pattern 3 Highlight the Send command to send a pattern or the Start command to monitor a pattern and press Enter to start the test or start monitoring it 4 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column An error count is also displayed When monitoring a pattern the ResetMon virtual function key appears ResetMon resets the error count to zero 5 Highlight Stop and press Enter to stop the test 6 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column 6 30 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Troubleshooting IP Ping Test An IP Ping test can be run to test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver unit router or NMS to which it has a route Times when you might want to run an IP Ping test are To test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver unit in the network to verify that the path is operational Select Procedure 1 to Ping any far end FrameSaver unit To verify the entire path between a newly installed remote site FrameSaver unit and the central site NMS During a remote site insta
259. sion vendor s circuit information to facilitate troubleshooting Text Field Edit or display circuit identifier information maximum 255 characters Clear Removes the circuit identifier information 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 3 27 Configuration Configuring the User Data Port 3 28 Select Physical from the Data Ports menu to configure the physical characteristics for the user data port see Table 3 5 Main Menu gt Configuration Data Ports Physical Table 3 5 Data Port Physical Interface Options 1 of 2 Transmit Clock Source Possible Settings Internal External Default Setting Internal Determines whether the DTE s transmitted data is clocked into the FrameSaver unit by its internal transmit clock or by the external clock provided by the DTE NOTE Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any physical port tests including any DTE initiated loopback tests Internal The FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing TXC DCE source for timing the incoming data External The DTE provides the clock for the transmitted data and the FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DA ITU 113 Transmit Signal Element Timing XTXC DTE source for timing the incoming data Invert Transmit Clock Possible Settings Auto Enable Disable Default Setting Auto Determines whether
260. ssible Settings None Proprietary Standard_out Default Setting None Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management data between devices Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link None No routing is used Proprietary A proprietary variant of RIP version 1 is used to communicate routing information only between devices to enable routing of IP traffic Standard_out The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing information about other FrameSaver units in the network Standard RIP messages received on this link are ignored Standard_out The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing information about other FrameSaver units in the network Standard RIP messages received on this link are ignored NOTE The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the COM port configured as the management interface e g Cisco config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 ctl z WR To create this management interface make sure that Node or COM port IP Information has been set up Configuring Node IP Information 3 66 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem 9124 A2 LB20 00 Select External Modem Com Port to display or change the configuration options that control call processing for an external device
261. sts of a 4 digit number followed by two digits and one alphabetic character 5 2 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Viewing LEDs and Control Leads The FrameSaver 9124 unit s faceplate includes LEDs light emitting diodes that provide status on the unit and its interfaces 9124 rt Ps SF SEK SS FrameSaver SLV CAE oOoooo0o o NETWORK DSX PORT 99 15821 02 The Display LEDs and Control Leads screen allows you to monitor a remote unit and is useful when troubleshooting control lead problems The appropriate interfaces are shown on this screen with the appropriate status highlighted Main Menu gt Status Display LEDs and Control Leads Display LEDs amp Control Leads Screen main status leds 9124 II Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 DISPLAY LEDS amp CONTROL LEADS NETWORK1 Sig OOF Alm Refresh Refresh the screen to view control lead transitions LED and control lead descriptions are in the sections that follow 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 5 3 Operation and Maintenance LED Descriptions 5 4 The following table identifies the alarms that cause the Alarm LED to light See Table 5 2 and Table 5 3 for network DSX 1 and user data port interface LED information Table 5 1 General Status LEDs Label Indication Color What It Means OK Power and Operational Status Green ON FrameSaver unit has power and it is operational
262. t Assignment Screen Example Page 1 main config tslot_assign dsx 9124 Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 DSX 1 TO NETWORK 1 ASSIGNMENTS Page 1 of 2 N01 N02 N03 N04 N05 N06 N07 N08 D01 1 01 D01 1 02 D01 1 03 D01 1 04 Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned N09 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 D01 1 09 D01 1 01 Available Available Available Available Available Available N17 N118 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save PgDn PgUp ClearAll FrAssign Page 2 of 2 is for defining signaling assignments and trunk conditioning for each DSX 1 interface time slot See DSX 1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning for an example of this screen For easy movement between screens select the FrAssign function key to go directly to the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen Time Slot Assignment Rules m Valid Network time slots are either Available or contain a DSX 1 time slot assignment m Valid DSX 1 time slots are those that are unassigned including the currently assigned time slot Order of display is as follows Available is the first selection Then from the lowest DSX 1 interface to the highest DSX 1 interface Then the lowest available time slot number to the highest available time slot number For example if the cursor is on a field with the Available value under assi
263. tall button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window to load alarms for the unit This may take some time so please be patient See Editing Alarms if any default settings need to be changed 8 8 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Editing Alarms gt Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window 2 Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area in the upper right of the window then Property down the center of the screen The Custom Property Editor window opens fe bsan JEE Raley Prey oo amtie File Geen iig Dea Tiri Hat Dora AT EI Ere Lid Eirig Falling DUCI 3 Select a DLCI from the Trap list and select the Edit button to the right of the list The Edit Trap window opens 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 8 9 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices lasisia Os Becta m hing Plig ia Mi Fa feet Fiiiag resh 4 Edit any trap defaults that may be required See Step 4 of Adding SLV Alarms Manually for field settings you may want to change 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to apply your changes The window closes and the Configuration Manager main window reappears 6 Select the Install button down the center of the Co
264. tatus enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies to the network side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Configures the LMI defined T3 parameter which is the time interval in seconds that the network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry messages that have been received N4 from the user side 5 30 Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 March 2000 3 19 Configuration Configuring Service Level Verification Options SLV options are selected from the System menu see Table 3 2 Main Menu gt Configuration gt System Service Level Verification Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options 1 of 2 SLV Sample Interval secs Possible Settings 10 3600 Default Setting 60 Sets the inband communications interval between FrameSaver SLV devices Inband communications are used to pass frames that calculate latency as well as transmission success and other SLV information 10 3600 Sets the SLV Samp
265. tected before a DLCI Inactive status is declared 1 20 Sets the limit for these error events 3 20 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options 2 of 2 SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of consecutive SLV messages that must be received before the DLCI Inactive status is cleared 1 20 Sets the limit for the clearing event SLV Packet Size bytes Available Settings 64 2048 Default Setting 64 Sets the size of packets in bytes that will be used for SLV communications SLV packets are used to track latency and other SLV related variables When the packet size is changed a new round trip and average latency calculation must be performed so these measurements will not appear on the SLV Performance Statistics screen until a new sampling interval has occurred 64 2048 Sets the packet size for SLV communications SLV Synchronization Role Available Settings Tributary Controller None Default Setting Tributary Determines the role the unit plays in maintaining synchronization of user history data collection and storage between SLV devices Tributary Uses network timing received from incoming SLV communications and provides network based synchronization information to other devices in the network Controller
266. terface used as the primary destination link the to end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if the network interface has no DLCls defined Neti FR1 would not appear as a valid setting Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface as the destination link Primary Destination DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the primary destination DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTE Primary Destination DLCI has no value if Primary Destination Link contains no value 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number Primary Destination EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the primary destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option only appears when the Primary Destination DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number March 2000 3 47 Configuration Setting Up Managem
267. th Source and Destination Statuses must be Active 5 22 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Time Slot Assignment Status Time Slot assignments are made using the Time Slot Assignment configuration option See Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections in Chapter 3 Configuration for making time slot assignments Use the Timeslot Assignment Status screen to display time slot assignments for the network channels and the DSX 1 channels Displaying Network Time Slot Assignments Use the Network Timeslot Assignment Status screen to display DSO assignments for each DSO on the network interface Main Menu gt Status gt Timeslot Assignment Status gt Network The Network Timeslot Assignment Status screen displays 24 two field entries in three rows Together each two field entry defines the assignment for one network interface time slot The top field represents the time slot of the network interface The bottom field represents the cross connect status of the associated top field network time slot Network Timeslot Assignment Status Screen Example main status timeslot net_display 9124 II Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 NETWORK 1 TIMESLOT ASSIGNMENT STATUS N01 N02 N03 N04 NOS NO6 NO7 NO8 D5 1 01r D5 1 02r D5 1 03r s1P01 S1P01 S1P01 S1P01 S1P01 N09 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 N17 N118 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 Unassign
268. tical intervals appear on the screen at any one time You can choose which intervals to display on your screen by entering Interval Number 01 96 Time Hours and Minutes NOTES Interval 01 is the interval occurring just prior to the current one Interval 02 is 2 intervals prior to the current one etc Selecting a specific time is useful when the approximate time at which a specific event occurred is known Edit any of the interval or time fields on lines 10 13 or 16 When Enter is pressed the values change to the selected range To select intervals You must enter an interval or time on Occurring on and before a__ Line 10 The display will include the selected interval plus selected interval or time the 6 intervals recorded before it Bracketing a selected Line 13 The display will include the selected interval plus interval or time the 3 intervals recorded before it and the 3 intervals recorded after it Occurring on and after a Line 16 The display will include the selected interval plus selected interval or time the 6 intervals recorded after it 5 34 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Operation and Maintenance ESF Line Performance Statistics Screen Example main status performance esf 9124 II Device Name Node A 05 26 1999 23 32 Network 1 ESF LINE PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Current Interval Timer ESF Error Events Near 123 Far 124 Near 15 Far 12 ES CSS LOFC Tim
269. tion or management link For example if Port 1 has no DLCls defined Port 1 would not appear as a valid setting Port 1 Specifies the user data port as the source link Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface or network data port as the source link Clear All Clears all Link and DLCI settings and suppresses EDLCIls Source DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the source DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTE Source DLCI has no value if Source Link contains no value 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number Source EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the source Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option only appears when Source DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 9124 A2 LB20 00 Configuration Table 3 10 PVC Connection Options 2 of 2 Primary Destination Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay in
270. to 12 5 Possible reasons include Network cable problem No signal is being transmitted at the far end FrameSaver unit T1 facility problem Network Com Link Down The communication link for the COM port is down and the COM port is configured for Net Link OOF at DSX 1 An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface Possible reasons include Incompatible framing format between the DTE and the FrameSaver unit DSX 1 cabling problem 2 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port March 2000 5 15 Operation and Maintenance 5 16 Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 3 of 4 Message What It Indicates OOF at Network 1 An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on the network interface Possible reasons include Incompatible framing format between the network and the FrameSaver unit Network cabling problem T1 facility problem Primary Clock Failed A failure of the primary clock source configured for the unit is detected and the secondary clock is providing the timing for the unit This condition clears when the configured primary clock is restored Primary amp Secondary Clocks Failed A failure of the primary and secondary clock sources configured for the unit are det
271. traight through cable can be used to connect a DTE port toa DTE where a 34 pin plug type connector is needed for the data port and a 34 position socket type connector is needed for the DTE No special order cables are required Standard V 35 Crossover Cable 9124 A2 LB20 00 A standard V 35 crossover cable with a 34 pin plug type connector on each end of the cable can be used to connect the FrameSaver unit s DTE port to another DCE The following illustration provides the pin assignments for the V 35 crossover cable A 8 did ob A cote z s ga cot ae D E uD HELL ele KK bi g 19 Q KK a a EN fe I Pas mM NN U7 a mu NN P1 P2 Pin Pin TXDA P T TXDB S a R RXDA R S RXDB T paa P TXCA Y Z TXCB AA AA Z Y RXCA V W RXCB X U ETXCA U X ETXCB W a V FRMGND A A SIGGND B B RTS C F CD F C DTR H E DSR E H LL L L 98 16165a March 2000 C 7 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments T1 Network Cable Feature No 3100 F 1 500 Network access is via a 20 foot cable with an RJ48C unkeyed plug type connector on each end The following table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each Function Circuit Direction Pin Number Receive Ring R1 From Network 1 Receive Tip T1 From Network 2 Transmit Ring R To Network 4 Transmit Tip T To Network 5 Canadian
272. ts sets all time slots to Unassgn unassigned Main Menu gt Configuration gt Time Slot Assignment gt Clear Assignments 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 3 39 Configuration Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface 3 40 Select Frame Relay from the interface s menu to display or change the Frame Relay options for an individual interface see Table 3 8 Main Menu gt Configuration Network Data Ports Frame Relay See Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System for additional information Table 3 8 Interface Frame Relay Options 1 of 3 LMI Protocol Possible Settings Initialize_From_Net1FR1 Initialize_From_Interface Auto_On_LMI_Fail Standard Annex A Annex D Default Setting For user data port links Initialize_From_Interface For network links Auto_On_LMI_Fail Specifies either the LMI protocol supported on the frame relay interface or the discovery source for the LMI protocol Initialize_From_Net1FR1 The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol initially discovered on the primary Network frame relay link Net1FR1 LMI Protocol is set to None internally but once a protocol has become active or is set on the primary Network link the protocol will be set to the same value on this link Standard Annex A or Annex D The protocol will not be updated based on changes to Net1FR1 after being set initially Display Conditions This option va
273. tuate and LLB Release commands NOTE When disabled the system is not in compliance with ANSI T1 403 or AT amp T TR 62411 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 3 25 Configuration Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options 3 of 4 Network Initiated PLB Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Allows the initiation and termination of the payload loopback PLB to be controlled by the receipt of PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands from the network Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable PLB is controlled by PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands Receiving a PLB Actuate command causes the system to enter a payload loopback provided a PLB can be performed in the unit s current state Receiving a PLB Release command terminates the PLB Disable The FrameSaver unit ignores the PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands NOTE When disabled the unit is not in compliance with ANSI T1 403 or AT amp T TR 54016 Network Initiated DCLB Possible Settings Disable V 54_ amp ANSI Default Setting V 54_ amp ANSI Allows the initiation and termination of the Data Channel Loopback DCLB V 54 Loop 2 to be controlled by the receipt of a DCLB actuate or DCLB release sequence either V 54 or FT1 ANSI compliant from the network on the DSOs used for the network frame relay link When enabled and a DCLB activate sequence is received the unit initiates a
274. tware Determining Whether a Download is Completed Changing Software Transferring Collected Data Displaying System Information Use the Identity screen to view identification information about the FrameSaver unit This information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement units and or making firmware upgrades Main Menu gt Status gt Identity View this field To find the System Name Domain name for this SNMP managed node up to 255 ASCII characters System Contact Contact person for this SNMP managed node System Location Physical location for this SNMP managed node NAM NAM Type Type of unit installed referred to as a network access module or NAM i e T1 FR NAM This card type is supported by the SNMP SysDescr Object Serial Number Unit s 7 character serial number Current Software Revision Software version currently being used by the unit Format nn nn nn consists of a 6 digit number that represents the major and minor revision levels Alternate Software Revision Software version that has been downloaded into the unit but has not yet been implemented Format is the same as for the Current Software Revision In Progress indicates that the flash memory is currently being downloaded Invalid indicates that no download has occurred or the download was not successful Hardware Revision Unit s hardware version Format nnnn nnx consi
275. umn Zeros appear under the Samples and Interval SH and LH columns Dashes appear under all Logging columns Stat Host Conv 4 lf all these requirements are met no further action is required Close the Configuration Manager window If all these requirements are not met a FrameSaver SLV supported domain needs to be added or if an unsupported domain needs to be deleted the Properties File must be edited 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 8 5 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Correcting Domains and Groups Properties need to be edited when not using the Paradyne provided file and when An unsupported domain needs to be deleted A missing domain needs to be added Groups Samples Interval and Logging are not configured as specified in Step 3 of Verifying Domains and Groups B gt Procedure 1 Select the the Property button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window The Property Editor window opens Taper FremePel ay Iial Logeling Si LM Giat Het Cone 0 D a ot i 0 o Li ob 3 Mr iar Lab be Type Bizing Falling 2 To delete an unsupported domain click on the domain from the Domains list then select the Delete button The Are you sure prompt appears Select Yes The unsupported domain disappears from the list 8 6 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Device
276. urely attached at both ends Contact your network provider 1 nnnn indicates a DLC number of 16 through 1007 2 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Tables The unit is designed to provide many years of trouble free service However if a problem occurs refer to the appropriate table in the following sections for possible solutions Device Problems Table 6 2 Device Problems 1 of 2 Symptom Possible Cause Solutions No power or the LEDs The power cord is not Check that the power cord is are not lit securely plugged into the securely attached at both ends wall receptacle to rear panel connection The wall receptacle has no Check the wall receptacle power power by plugging in some equipment that is known to be working Check the circuit breaker Verify that your site is not on an energy management program Power On Self Test The unit has detected an Reset the unit and try again fails Only Alarm LED internal hardware failure is on after power up Contact your SSIES representative Return the unit to the factory 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 6 13 Troubleshooting 6 14 Table 6 2 Device Problems 2 of 2 Symptom
277. us System and LMI Test Status Reported Self Test Results DLCIs Health and DLCI Status Status Test Status CIR bps PVC Connection Status Source Link DLCI EDLCI Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI LMI Reported DLC Is PVC Connection Status Performance Statistics Display LEDs and Control Leads Identity Timeslot Identity Assignment System Status NAM Network Timeslot Status DSX 1 Timeslot Status Timeslot Assignment Status PVC Tests DLC Number PVC Loopback Send Pattern Monitor Pattern Connectivity Status Clear Assignments Test lt PVC Tests Network Data Port Physical Tests Network Data Port DSX 1 Other IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests March 2000 Physical Tests Local Loopbacks Remote Loopbacks Send Monitor Pattern Tests MAIN MENU Test Configuration Control Performance Statistics Service Level Verification DLCI Frame Relay ESF Line e Clear All Statistics MAIN MENU Status Configuration Auto Configuration Control 99 16345a 9124 A2 LB20 00 Auto Configuration Configuration Edit Display System Frame Relay and LMI Service Level Verification General Auto Configuration Frame Relay Discovery Mode Automatic Circuit Removal System DSX 1 Network and Data Ports Physical Frame Relay DLCI Records MAIN MENU Status Test Con
278. use this feature enable the Test Timeout configuration option and set a duration for the test to run in the Test Duration min configuration option see Configuring General System Options in Chapter 3 Configuration 6 16 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Troubleshooting NOTE These configuration options do not pertain to tests commanded by the DTE like a DTE initiated External Loopback Starting and Stopping a Test Use this procedure to start monitor or abort specific tests To abort all active tests on all interfaces see Aborting All Tests When the status of a testis The only command available is Inactive Start Active Stop Start or stop an individual test using the same procedure B gt Procedure To start and stop a loopback or a set pattern test 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test 2 Select an interface and test e g Network or Data Port PVC Tests and press Enter The selected test screen appears Start appears in the Command column Inactive appears in the Status column 3 Select the Port number and press Enter 4 Select the DLC number and press Enter if a PVC test has been selected The cursor is positioned at Start in the Command column of the first available test Start is highlighted 5 Highlight the Start command for the test you want to start and press Enter Stop now appears and is highlighted and the status of the test changes to Active 6
279. ut Manager Plus to load a file that contains the OIDs Object IDs to be monitored into the unit OpenLane provides several useful examples including three files containing a complete set of OIDs appropriate to the interface to be monitored one for a DLCI one for a frame relay link and one containing system type OIDs Any of these files can be used as a template when creating customized history files specific to the FrameSaver unit These files have a pdn udh user defined history format and are found in the OpenLane netscout userHistory directory The userHistory files should be moved to SNSHOME usr so they can be used A separate udh file must be created and loaded for each DLCI or link that will be monitored before a customized user history table can be loaded Use a text editor to create these udh files by Copying one of the interface specific files DLCI or link and editing it using one of the examples provided as a guide Copying one of the examples provided and editing the extensions to fit the FrameSaver unit CAUTION Two user history table files are already configured and installed in the unit UserHistory1 and UserHistory2 These files must not be modified These two tables are used to keep SLV data for reports It is always a good idea to rediscover agents and their DLCls before starting to be sure your agent and DLCI lists are current To rediscover agents and their DLCls select the Learn button on the Net
280. ve RIP For example if using a Cisco router configure config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 then ctl z WR 2 Create a Standard DLCI for the user data port Configuration Data Ports DLC Records 3 Create a Management PVC using the user data port DLCI just configured Configuration Management and Communication Management PVCs 4 Set Primary Link RIP to Standard_Out and Save the configuration Refer to Table 3 9 DLC Record Options and Table 3 12 Management PVC Options for configuration information Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity at the Central Site When management needs to be set up between a service provider s customer and its network operations center NOC a non multiplexed DLCI must be configured to carry management data between the customer s central site and the NOC console This requires that a frame relay discovered DLCI needs to be modified This is because all auto configured network DLCls are configured as multiplexed DLCls B gt Procedure To set up NOC management 1 Select DLCI Records on the network interface Configuration Network DLC Records 2 Select Modify The Modify DLCI Record for DLCI Number prompt appears 3 Select the DLC that will be used by pressing the spacebar until the correct DLCI number appears then select it 4 Change the DLCI Type from Multiplexed to Standard The DLCI in connections Update DLCI usage as follows prompt a
281. y 3 62 central clock 1 3 CGA changing configuration options domains and groups operating mode software release Channel Loopback Character Length 3 63 matching CIR statistics CIR bps 3 44 Circuit Identifier 3 27 circuit multiplexed PVCs March 2000 IN 1 Index Clearing cross connection assignments Event LMI 3 19 3 41 existing information clearing statistics Clock Invert Transmit setting system Source 3 22 3 23 Transmit COM port 3 49 8 60 1 3 67 connector set up for trap dial out Committed Burst Size Bc Bits Committed Information Rate CIR 3 44 Communication Port user interface options 3 63 Community Name 3 54 assigning Concord Network Health compatibility Concord s Network Health Configuration Auto Active displaying and changing options menu menu branch 2 4 option areas option tables 3 17 saving options tables upload download configuring added SLV units elements DLCI records manually frame relay options NetScout Manager Plus network interface 3 24 SLV options 3 20 System options 3 17 the system Connectivity setting up service provider 3 15 test 6 21 Control keys 2 6 lead descriptions Leads Ignore 3 64 menu branch 2 4 IN 2 March 2000 Control Leads and LEDs displaying controlling async terminal access external device access FTP access SNMP acces
282. y LMI packet capture data is not available readable when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is Active 2 Perform a get of the Imitrace syc file One of the following will display for the file File Transfer Complete File Transfer Failed Permission Denied The LMI Packet Capture Utility was not readable Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility and try again 3 Close the FTP session SLV statistics and or LMI Packet Capture data are now available for reporting 9124 A2 LB20 00 March 2000 5 41 Operation and Maintenance 5 42 March 2000 9124 A2 LB20 00 Troubleshooting 9124 A2 LB20 00 This chapter includes the following Problem Indicators Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit Troubleshooting Management Link Feature LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface Alarms Troubleshooting Tables Device Problems Frame Relay PVC Problems Tests Available Test Timeout Feature Starting and Stopping a Test Aborting All Tests PVC Tests PVC Loopback Send Pattern Monitor Pattern Connectivity March 2000 6 1 Troubleshooting m Physical Tests Line Loopback Payload Loopback Repeater Loopback DTE Loopback Send Line Loopback
283. y Configuring DLC Records for additional information Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Management PVCs Select New or Modify to add or change Management PVCs m When you select New the configuration option field is blank m When you select Modify the values displayed for all fields are based on the PVC ID number that you specified From this screen you can go directly to the PVC Connections screen by selecting the PVCConn function key for easy movement between screens Select the Delete function key a Management PVC ID and respond Yes to the Remove otherwise unused components associated with the deleted PVC prompt for quick removal of unused DLCls If the Management PVC selected is defined as a trap Initial Route Destination a Default IP Destination or a TS Management Link an Are You Sure prompt appears to warn you Table 3 12 Management PVC Options 1 of 3 Name Possible Settings ASCII Text Entry Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies a unique name for the management PVC as referenced on screens e g Tpa for Tampa Florida ASCII Text Entry Enter a unique name for the management PVC maximum length 8 characters Intf IP Address Possible Settings Node IP Address Special nnn nnn nnn nnn Default Setting Node IP Address Specifies the IP address needed to access the unit via this management PVC providing connectivity to an exter
284. y are put into the NetScout alarm area Table B 12 identifies alarm defaults that do not change and Table B 13 identifies alarm defaults that change when the interface s line speed changes The thresholds for these alarms can be edited using NetScout Manager Plus so they match the values in the SLA between the customer and service provider Up to eight alarms per interface are allowed Any additional alarms are added to the Paradyne Area alarms and they cannot be changed using NetScout software See Editing Alarms in Chapter 8 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Table B 12 Static DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area 1 of 2 Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Current Latency A MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs None Must be 0 1 min configured Tag devFrExtLatencyLatest OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 7 1 D Average Latency A MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs None Must be 0 Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg pms sonngurga OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Frames Received D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs None Must be 0 RFC 2115 1 min configured Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Frames Sent D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs None Must be 0 RFC 2115 1 min configured Tag frCircuitSentFrames OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Tx Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs None Must be 0

Lucent Technologies Window SLV 9124 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents